System and method for low level dimming
Claim Score by NHIP
Abstract
The present disclosure is directed to an inexpensive yet intelligent solution for dimming light devices to low level intensities in which the common lighting systems generally have difficulties maintaining stability and flicker-free operation. The systems and method described herein enable a lighting system to utilize a dimmer to dim one or more lighting devices to low level intensities without introducing flickering or inconsistent operation of the lights. More specifically, the systems and methods described herein enable a dimmer to dim lights to anywhere between 0% and 5% of maximum brightness, while ensuring that the lights operate at these levels consistently, smoothly and without any visible flickering.

Term
Projected expiry 5 April 2034.
- Priority
- Filed
- Published
- Today
- Projected expiry
20 claims: 2 independent, 18 dependent
- 1A method for manipulating levels of brightness for a lighting device, the method comprising:(a) receiving, by an interface device, an input signal being transmitted to a lighting device, the input signal representing a first level of brightness;(b) identifying, by the interface device, a digital value for the input signal, digital value having a predetermined number of bits;(c) generating, by the interface device, a truncated digital value by removing a portion of bits from the digital value;(d) mapping, by the interface device, the truncated digital value to a non-truncated digital value having the predetermined number of bits and that represents a second level of brightness;and (e) transmitting, by the interface device, a second signal representing the non-truncated digital value as the input signal to be transmitted to the lighting device.
- 11Broadest claimClaim Score 55, average(NHIP)A system for manipulating levels of brightness for a lighting device, the system comprising:an interface device receiving an input signal being transmitted to a lighting device and identifies a digital value for the input signal, the input signal representing a first level of brightness, the digital value having a predetermined number of bits;a truncator of the interface device generating a truncated digital value by removing a portion of bits from the digital value and mapping the truncated digital value to a non-truncated digital value having the predetermined number of bits and that represents a second level of brightness;and wherein the interface device transmits, a second signal representing the non-truncated digital value as the input signal to be transmitted to the lighting device.
Independent claims2
329 paragraphs in 6 sections, as filed
RELATED APPLICATION
0001The present application claims the benefit of and priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/453,412, entitled “Systems and Methods For Low level Dimming” and filed on Mar. 16, 2011, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
0002The present application is generally related to lighting systems. In particular, the present application is directed to systems and methods for controlling and modulating intensity of the light emitted by a light emitting device.
BACKGROUND
0003Lighting systems may include light emitting devices organized in various configurations depending on the illumination applications. Some lighting systems provide only limited control of the brightness of the lighting devices. Some traditional lighting systems may not be able to dim lights to low levels of brightness as the lights begin to flicker or operate inconsistently. Such systems generally do not have a capability to provide a more sophisticated lighting control at lower dimming levels.
SUMMARY
0004The present disclosure is directed to an inexpensive yet intelligent solution for dimming light devices to low level intensities in which the common lighting systems generally have difficulties maintaining stability and flicker-free operation. The systems and method described herein enable a lighting system to utilize a dimmer to dim one or more lighting devices to low level intensities without introducing flickering or inconsistent operation of the lights. More specifically, the systems and methods described herein enable a dimmer to dim lights to anywhere between 0% and 5% of maximum brightness, while ensuring that the lights operate at these levels consistently, smoothly and without any visible flickering.
0005A dimming function interfacing with a dimmer, either directly, or via an isolation circuit, may receive from the dimmer an incoming PWM (Pulse Width Modulated/Modulation) signal. The dimming function may either determine the duty cycle of the PWM signal or receive the duty cycle from the isolation circuit. Should a duty cycle signal be an analog signal, the dimming function may use an analog to digital converter to convert the signal into a digital representation of the duty cycle. An edge filter of the dimming function may count the edges of the PWM signal to determine if the PWM signal is a dimming signal or a signal in an Off state or an On state. Should the edge filter determine that the PWM signal is a dimming signal, a truncator of the dimming function truncates a portion of the converted digital PWM duty cycle signal and then scales the remaining portion of the truncated signal to restore the scaled signal to the same bit size. A delta function may be used to determine a delta between the new PWM duty cycle reading and a previous PWM duty cycle reading. Based on the determined delta being larger or smaller than a threshold, hysteretic filter of the dimming function may determine to accept or reject the new PWM duty cycle. Should the hysteretic filter determine that the new PWM duty cycle is valid, the hysteretic filter may determine which mathematical functions or algorithms to use to process the new PWM duty cycle reading, thus reducing any noise or sudden fluctuations in the signal. Once the new PWM duty cycle signal is processed and scaled by the hysteretic filter, the smoothing filter may use the new PWM duty cycle signal to smoothly and gradually update or change the PWM signal determining the brightness of the lighting device.
0006Using these techniques, the dimming function ensures that the PWM duty cycle reaching the lighting device is filtered from any sudden changes or flickers, thus reducing the noise and enabling the lighting device to operate consistently and smoothly even in the range of 0% to 5% of the maximum brightness.
0007In some aspects, the present solution is directed to a method for manipulating levels of brightness for a lighting device. The method includes receiving, by an interface device, an input signal being transmitted to a lighting device. The input signal may be analog or digital and represents a first level of brightness. The method includes identifying, by the interface device, for the input signal a digital value having a predetermined number of bits and generating a truncated digital value by removing a portion of bits from the digital value. The interface device maps the truncated digital value to a non-truncated digital value having the predetermined number of bits and that represents a second level of brightness. The method further includes transmitting, by the interface device, a second signal representing the non-truncated digital value as the input signal to be transmitted to the lighting device.
0008In some embodiments, the method includes determining, by the interface device, that the input signal is dimmed. In some embodiments, the method includes comprise receiving, by the interface device, the input signal via one of the following types of signals: pulse width modulation signal, a one-wire signal, a dimming protocol signal, and a wireless protocol. In some embodiments, the interface device comprises one of the following: a controller, a chip, a component for a printed circuit board, a switch of the lighting device or a triac dimmer. In some embodiments, the lighting device comprises one of a Lighting Emitting Diode (LED) fixture or LED driver.
0009In some embodiments, the method includes mapping by the interface device, the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on a temperature reading from a temperature sensor. In some embodiments, the method includes mapping, by the interface device, the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on a sensor reading from an area sensor. In some embodiments, the method includes mapping by the interface device, the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on data stored in memory, the data comprising information on history of operation of the interface device. In some embodiments, the method includes transmitting, by the interface device, the non-truncated digital value via one of the following types of output signals: pulse width modulation signal, logic level signal, a serial stream and a ramp signal. In some embodiments, the method includes transmitting, by the interface device, the non-truncated digital value to a regulator that adjusts an intensity level to an LED or LED driver based on a level set by the non-truncated digital value.
0010In some aspects, the present solution is directed to a system for manipulating levels of brightness for a lighting device. The system includes an interface device. The interface device receives an input signal being transmitted to a lighting device. The input signal may be analog or digital. The interface device identifies a digital value for the input signal representing a first level of brightness. The digital value has a predetermined number of bits. The system includes a truncator generating a truncated digital value by removing a portion of bits from the digital value and mapping the truncated digital value to a non-truncated digital value having the predetermined number of bits and that represents a second level of brightness. The interface device transmits a second signal representing the non-truncated digital value as the input signal to be transmitted to the lighting device.
0011In some embodiments, the interface device determines that the input signal is dimmed. In some embodiments, the interface device receives the input signal via one of the following types of signals: pulse width modulation signal, a one-wire signal, a dimming protocol signal, and a wireless protocol. In some embodiments, the interface device may be one of the following: a controller, a chip, a component for a printed circuit board, a switch of the lighting device or a triac dimmer. The system may include a lighting device that comprises one of a Lighting Emitting Diode (LED) fixture or LED driver.
0012In some embodiments, the truncator maps the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on a temperature reading from a temperature sensor. In some embodiments, the truncator maps the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on a sensor reading from an area sensor. In some embodiments, the truncator maps the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on data stored in memory, the data comprising information on history of operation of the interface device. In some embodiments, the interface device transmits the non-truncated digital value via one of the following types of output signals: pulse width modulation signal, logic level signal, a serial stream and a ramp signal. In some embodiments, the interface device transmits the non-truncated digital value to a regulator that adjusts an intensity level to an LED or LED driver based on a level set by the non-truncated digital value.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
0013The foregoing and other objects, aspects, features, and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent and better understood by referring to the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:
0014<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of an environment of a lighting system and components of the lighting system;
0015<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1B</figref> is a block diagram that depicts another embodiment of a lighting system and components of the lighting system;
0016<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1C</figref> is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of a communication system between light sources;
0017<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1D</figref> is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of a light source control and communication;
0018<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> are block diagrams of embodiments of digital communication between light sources, intensity control and master/slave control;
0019<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> is a flow chart illustrating steps of a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal.
0020<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4B</figref> are block diagrams of embodiments of additional light intensity control embodiments;
0021<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4C</figref> is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for modulating intensity of light using a digital pattern of a signal;
0022<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5A</figref> is a block diagram of a system or an apparatus, such as a non-contact switch for selecting and controlling one or more light sources;
0023<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5B</figref> is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for detecting presence of an object or a person via a non-contact switch;
0024<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6A</figref> is a block diagram of an embodiment for lighting devices transmitting power, intensity and instructions for assigning a status to a lighting device via a connection;
0025<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6B</figref> is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of method for assigning a status to a lighting device via a connection used by the lighting device for receiving intensity and/or power;
0026<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7A</figref> is a block diagram of an embodiment of a system for low level dimming using a noise reducing dimming function;
0027<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7B</figref> is a functional diagram of an embodiment of systems and methods for low level dimming using a noise reducing dimming function;
0028<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7C</figref> is a block diagram of an embodiment of a system for using input to output mapping techniques via an interface; and
0029<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7D</figref> is a flow diagram illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for using input to output mapping techniques via an interface.
0030The features and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent from the detailed description set forth below when taken in conjunction with the drawings, in which like reference characters identify corresponding elements throughout.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
0031For purposes of reading the description of the various embodiments of the present invention below, the following descriptions of the sections of the specification and their respective contents may be helpful: <ul id="ul0001" list-style="none"><li id="ul0001-0001" num="0000"><ul id="ul0002" list-style="none"><li id="ul0002-0001" num="0032">Section A describes lighting system environment and components of the lighting system;</li><li id="ul0002-0002" num="0033">Section B relates to systems and methods for communication among lighting system components;</li><li id="ul0002-0003" num="0034">Section C relates to embodiments for status assignment of the light sources;</li><li id="ul0002-0004" num="0035">Section D relates to embodiments for lighting system intensity control with digital patterning and color mixing;</li><li id="ul0002-0005" num="0036">Section E relates to embodiments for non-contact selection and control of lighting system components;</li><li id="ul0002-0006" num="0037">Section F relates to systems and methods for status assignment of the light sources; and</li><li id="ul0002-0007" num="0038">Section G relates to systems and methods for low level dimming.</li></ul></li></ul>
A. Lighting System and Lighting System Components
0039Lighting system <b>100</b> comprises a number of lighting system components which may be used for a variety of lighting or illumination applications in numerous environments. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> illustrates a block diagram of an environment within which lighting system <b>100</b> may be used. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> illustrates a lighting system <b>100</b> comprising lighting system components called lighting devices, or light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C. The lighting system <b>100</b> also includes additional lighting system components: a communicator <b>125</b>, a controller <b>120</b>, a master/slave addressor <b>130</b> and a power supply <b>140</b>. All the lighting system components illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> are connected to each other via connections <b>105</b>. Connections <b>105</b> are depicted running into or running through a network <b>104</b>. In many embodiments, network <b>104</b> comprises a plurality of connections <b>105</b> through which signals, information or data packets, or electrical power are propagated. In a plurality of embodiments, network <b>104</b> and connections <b>105</b> provide connections between any of the lighting system components.
0040<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> depicts light sources <b>110</b> comprising various components. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> presents a light source <b>110</b>A comprising: a controller <b>120</b>A, a communicator <b>125</b>A which further comprises an address <b>127</b>A, a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A, and a power supply <b>140</b>A. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> also illustrates a light source <b>110</b>B which includes only a communicator <b>125</b>B. Light source <b>110</b>C is shown by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> comprising a controller <b>120</b>C and an address <b>127</b>C. Other lighting system components, such as a communicator <b>125</b>, controller <b>120</b>, power supply <b>140</b> and master/slave addressor <b>130</b> are illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> as individual and independent lighting system components not comprising any additional subcomponents.
0041In some embodiments, however, any of the communicator <b>125</b>, controller <b>120</b>, power supply <b>140</b> and master/slave addressor <b>130</b> may comprise any number of lighting system components or subcomponents. Herein, the term lighting system component, may be used interchangeably for any component or subcomponent within a lighting system <b>100</b> or for any component related to a lighting system <b>100</b>. Furthermore, terms lighting device, device, light source, lighting fixture or a lighting unit may also be used interchangeably and may comprise any number of similar or other lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0042Lighting system <b>100</b>, illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref>, may be any system including one or more lighting devices <b>100</b>, also referred to as light sources <b>110</b>. Sometimes, lighting system <b>100</b> is a system comprising one or more light sources or light fixtures controlled by one or more lighting system components. In a plurality of embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> includes a number of light sources <b>110</b> connected to each other. In a number of embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> includes a number of light sources <b>110</b> connected to a power supply <b>140</b> or a source of electricity, such as an electrical outlet. In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is a system comprising a plurality of light sources <b>110</b> or other lighting system components connected to each other and communicating with each other. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises a plurality of lighting system components electrically connected to each other in parallel. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises a plurality of lighting system components electrically connected to each other in series. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises components, such as light sources <b>110</b> or power supplies <b>140</b> connected to each other in parallel or in series or in a combination of parallel and series electrical connections. Sometimes, lighting system <b>100</b> includes any number of systems, products, components or devices assisting any functionality, operation or control of light sources <b>110</b>. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> includes one or more components, systems, products or devices assisting or controlling communication between a light source <b>110</b> and another light source <b>110</b> or another component, device, system or product. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is any system comprising a plurality of light sources <b>110</b>, such as light fixtures for example, illuminating or lighting an area or a space. In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is any system comprising a plurality of light sources <b>110</b>, providing illumination or lighting an area or a space as controlled by one or more lighting system components.
0043In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more lighting devices, or light sources <b>110</b>. In numerous embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more light sources <b>110</b> comprising a power supply <b>140</b>. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>, a controller <b>120</b>, a power supply <b>140</b> and a communicator <b>125</b> as separate and independent components of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system components are electrically connected to one or more light sources <b>110</b> via connections, cables, wires, lines or any electrically conductive mediums. In some embodiments, lighting system components are electrically connected to one or more light sources <b>110</b> via network <b>104</b>. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises any number of lighting system components connected to each other or other lighting system components either directly via connections <b>105</b>, via combinations of connections <b>105</b> and network <b>104</b> or via one or more networks <b>104</b>.
0044In one embodiment, the lighting system <b>100</b> is installed, deployed or otherwise provided in any type or form of indoor, outdoor, residential or commercial environment. In one embodiment, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in any type of indoor environment. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in a residential building or a room. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in a commercial building or an office area. In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in a store or a mall. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in a hallway, or a parking garage. In numerous embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in a restaurant or a museum. In some embodiments, the lighting system <b>100</b> is installed in a laboratory or a research or development laboratory, area or an institution. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed in an outside environment, such as a stadium, or a concert stage. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is deployed, installed or provided in a town square, residential area, or section of a town or city.
0045In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more light sources <b>110</b> which are different from other light sources <b>110</b> of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more light sources <b>110</b> which are same or similar to other light sources <b>110</b> of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> includes only one or two light sources <b>110</b> while in other embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> includes a very large number of light sources <b>110</b>, such as tens or hundreds. In a plurality of embodiments, a plurality of lighting systems <b>100</b> are electrically connected to each other and form one larger lighting system <b>100</b> or a lighting system farm. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> includes a plurality of separate lighting systems <b>100</b> or lighting system farms.
0046Connections <b>105</b> are represented in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> by lines connecting components of lighting system <b>100</b> to other lighting system <b>100</b> components via network <b>104</b>. Connections <b>105</b> may comprise any type of medium or means for transferring, transporting or propagating electrical power, electronic analog or digital signals, or any other type of communication signal between any two components or devices of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a wire or a plurality of wires of any size or gauge capable of conducting electricity or an electronic signal. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a cable including one or more electrical conductors electrically insulated from each other and other conductors. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises a plurality of separate and mutually insulated conductive mediums, each one transmitting a separate signal or information. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a cable including a plurality of wires insulated with any non-conductive material, the wires being used for electrical power distribution in residential or commercial areas. In certain embodiments, connection <b>105</b> includes a cable or a group of wires of any size and gauge comprising any electrical current conducting material. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises an optical fiber transmitting an optical signal. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a coaxial cable. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a wire harness comprising any number of sheathed or unsheathed wires, each wire transmitting a separate signal without interference from an outside wire. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a wire harness comprising a plurality of mediums for transmitting electrical signals and optical signals. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a wire harness comprising three separate mediums for transmitting electrical signals or conducting electricity. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises a plurality of current conducting mediums wherein each of the mediums is sheathed or electrically insulated from other conducting mediums of the connection <b>105</b>.
0047Connection <b>105</b>, in some embodiments, is a wireless connection between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises a medium for wireless communication between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, the connection <b>105</b> is a wireless communication link between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, the connection <b>105</b> is a medium through which wireless communication of two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components is propagated. The connection <b>105</b> may comprise any number of wireless communication links and wired communication links. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises a number of connection <b>105</b> components each of which may further comprise any number of wireless communication links for communication between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. The wireless communication link or the wireless communication propagated via connection <b>105</b> may refer to any transfer of information between any two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components without the use of electrical conductors or wires. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises any one, or any combination of: a metal wire, a metal line, a cable having one or more wires or lines, a light guide, an optical fiber and a wireless link or wireless connection system. In some of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises a plurality of connection <b>105</b> components comprising metal lines or wires, wireless links, optical fibers or cables.
0048Network <b>104</b> may be any medium or means for transferring electrical power, electronic data, electromagnetic waves, electrical signals, or communication signals between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, network <b>104</b> is a mesh of connections <b>105</b> connecting any lighting system component with any other component of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, network <b>104</b> comprises a number of connections <b>105</b> connecting light sources <b>110</b>, with each other. In many embodiments, network <b>104</b> comprises a number of connections <b>105</b> connecting any lighting system <b>100</b> component to any other lighting system <b>100</b> component. Network <b>104</b>, in some embodiments, is plurality of connections <b>105</b> connecting specific lighting system <b>100</b> components to other specific lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system components are connected to other lighting system components via one or more connections <b>105</b>. The network <b>104</b> may also be a wireless network and comprise any number of wireless communication links between any number of lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, the network <b>104</b> comprises wireless links and non-wireless links, such as connections via wires. Network <b>104</b>, in some embodiments, is a plurality of connections <b>105</b> connecting any of the lighting system <b>100</b> components to any other lighting system <b>100</b> components, such as a lighting device <b>110</b>A to lighting devices <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C and vice versa.
0049A device <b>110</b>, also referred to as a lighting device <b>110</b> or a light source <b>110</b>, is any device performing or executing a function or an instruction, or any device operating, outputting or performing as instructed or commanded by an instruction or information received by the device via a connection <b>105</b>. In many embodiments, device <b>110</b> is any device or an apparatus performing a functionality as directed by a signal. The device <b>110</b> may be any electrical, electromechanical or mechanical component, such as a motor for example. The device <b>110</b> may be an engine, a turbine, or may be any apparatus or a system comprising a motor or an engine. In some embodiments, device <b>110</b> is a device, apparatus or a material capable of producing, emitting or emanating light or electromagnetic radiation. In a plurality of embodiments, a device <b>110</b> is any device performing any functionality as instructed via a connection <b>105</b> or any device transmitting instruction to other devices <b>110</b>, even if the device <b>110</b> or the devices <b>110</b> receiving or transmitting instructions are not light emitting devices. Devices <b>110</b> may be any electronic or electrical components, devices, products or apparatuses performing a function or an operation in response to an electrical or electronic signal.
0050In many embodiments, device <b>110</b> is a lighting device <b>110</b> or a lighting fixture, a light source, or any device producing or emitting light. In a plurality of embodiments, device <b>110</b> or a light source <b>110</b> is a fluorescent light. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a lamp or a light bulb. In many embodiments, light source is a white light emitting diode. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a semiconductor light emitting device, such as a light emitting diode of any spectral or wavelength range. In a plurality of embodiments, the light source <b>110</b> is a broadband lamp or a broadband light source. In number of embodiments, the light source <b>110</b> is a black light. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a hollow cathode lamp. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a fluorescent tube light source. In some embodiments, the light source <b>110</b> is a neon or argon lamp. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a plasma lamp. In certain embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a xenon flash lamp. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a mercury lamp. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a metal halide lamp. In certain embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a sulfur lamp. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a laser, or a laser diode. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is an OLED, PHOLED, QDLED, or any other variation of a light source <b>110</b> utilizing an organic material. In certain embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a monochromatic light source. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a polychromatic light source. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a light source emitting light partially in the spectral range of ultraviolet light. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a device, product or a material emitting light partially in the spectral range of visible light. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a device, product or a material partially emanating or emitting light in the spectral range of the infra red light. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a device, product or a material emanating or emitting light in the visible spectral range. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes a filter to control the spectral range of the light emitted from the light source <b>110</b>. In certain embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes a light guide, an optical fiber or a waveguide through which light is emitted from the light source <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes one or more mirrors for reflecting or redirecting of light. In some embodiments, lighting device <b>110</b> reflects light emitted from another light source. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes a light reactive material affecting the light emitted, such as a polarizer, filter or a prism. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a coherent light source. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>, or a lighting device <b>110</b>, is an incoherent light source.
0051The device <b>110</b>, or the lighting device <b>110</b>, may be any light emitting device, comprising one or more light sources and capable of providing light to an area or a space. In other embodiments, lighting device <b>110</b> is a semiconductor light emitting diode producing an incoherent light of any given spectral or power range. In another embodiment, lighting device <b>110</b> is an ultra-violet light emitting source used for illuminating a light reactive material. A light reactive material sometimes, in response to the illuminated light absorbs the light, and in response to the absorbed light, produces a light of its own. In some embodiments, lighting device <b>110</b> is an LED or a light source used for color rendering of the fruits, vegetables, meats or any light reactive materials. In a number of embodiments, lighting device <b>110</b> emits light which alters the color of the object illuminated by the light source <b>110</b> as perceived by the human eye. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> is used for illuminating an object whose appearance of color pigment is shifted as perceived by a human eye in response to the illumination of the object using a specific spectral range of light. For example, an object of a yellow pigment may appear orange to a human eye when illuminated by purple light. In another example, a blue pigment may appear black to a human eye when illuminated by orange light. In some embodiments, an object of a red pigment, when illuminated by a deep red light may be perceived by human eye as a even more red. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> emits a light having a specific spectral range tailored for illuminating a specific object and creating a perception to a human observer of an object having a different color pigment as the result of the illumination. In some embodiments, an array of light sources <b>110</b> are used to vary the wavelength and intensity of the light emitted. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a monochromatic light source, emitting only a single wavelength of light. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a tunable light source, emitting a light of varying spectral range. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> is a broadband light utilizing a filter for narrowing down the light spectral range. Light source <b>110</b>, in some embodiments, is any device, product or material emitting, emanating or illuminating light of any spectral or power range, any constant output or varying intensity output, and any type of coherent or incoherent light.
0052In some other embodiment, light source <b>110</b> creates color of the light emitted from the light source <b>110</b> using a plurality of light sources emitting specific wavelengths of light which individually or mixed produce the color of the light emitted. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes one or more light sources emitting a monochromatic light. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes one or more light sources emitting a relatively monochromatic light, wherein relatively means about ninety percent monochromatic. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> includes one or more light sources emitting a light having a narrow spectral range which when mixed with other light produces white light or light of a color different from the original color. In a plurality of embodiments, monochromatic light is a light having only a single wavelength of light. Relatively monochromatic light is a light similar to a light emitted by a monochromatic laser or a laser diode and it may have a spectral wavelength range of one or a few nanometers. Narrow spectral range, in some embodiments, means a range of about five to fifty nanometers of wavelength range. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> emits one or more of any of the monochromatic, relatively monochromatic or a narrow spectral range light individually or in any combination. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> emits blue light, such as the light having wavelength length between 460 nanometers and 490 nanometers. Light emanated or emitted from the light source, in some embodiments, has shorter wavelengths or a higher energy than the visible light. In some embodiments, light emitted or emanated from a light source <b>110</b> has a spectral range at least partially in the ultraviolet range and at least partially in a visible range. In a plurality of embodiments, the light emitted or emanated from a light source <b>110</b> has a spectral range at least partially in the visible range and at least partially in the infrared range. In a number of embodiments, light emitted from a light source <b>110</b> is pulsed or varying in intensity, or continuous and/or without any interruption in emission. In some embodiments, light emitted from light source <b>110</b> is periodically or non-periodically pulsed. In some embodiments, a light source <b>110</b> comprises a plurality of light sources, each of which emits a light having a partially different wavelength from light emitted by other light sources of the light source <b>110</b>. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a plurality of light sources each emitting a light of different color or a different wavelength or wavelength range. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a plurality of light sources, wherein each of the light sources emits a light having a different intensity or power range.
0053The device <b>110</b>, also referred to as the light source <b>110</b>, may also comprise a wireless device, such as a wireless signal receiver or a wireless signal transmitter. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises an antenna for receiving or for transmitting wireless communication. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a wireless connector, a wireless receiver or a wireless signal emitter. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a device or a unit controlling and implementing wireless communication between two or more light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, the light source <b>110</b> may comprise a wireless link, such as an infrared channel or satellite band. In many embodiments, the light source <b>110</b> comprises a wireless RF network port, such as a network port supporting IEEE 802.11 wireless communication protocols or Bluetooth technology. In a plurality of embodiments, any lighting system <b>100</b> component may comprise any number of wireless communication devices, such as wireless network ports, wireless transmitters or receivers or wireless transceiver used for wireless communication between the lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0054In a number of embodiments, the light source <b>110</b> comprises a controller <b>120</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a communicator <b>125</b>. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a power supply <b>140</b>. In certain embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises any of, or any combination of: controller <b>120</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> and power supply <b>140</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises an enclosure which encloses any of or any combination of: controller <b>120</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> and power supply <b>140</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a connection <b>105</b> which can be used to connect the light source <b>110</b> with any other light sources <b>110</b> or other lighting system components.
0055Light system components may transmit to the light sources <b>110</b> signals comprising any number of instructions. Instructions, such as the instruction <b>650</b>, may include any type and form of instruction or command for operating, configuring, controlling or managing on or more light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, an instruction comprises a command to set a master or slave status to a lighting device. In other embodiments, instruction includes an instruction to turn a lighting device on or off. In further embodiments, instruction instructs a lighting device to change intensity of light, wavelength of light, pulse of light. In some embodiments, instruction comprises a command to change or set up a configuration of a device, such as a pulsing illumination mode or a constant illumination mode. The instruction may also include a command to include a lighting device <b>110</b> into a zone or a group of a plurality of lighting devices. In some embodiments, instruction comprises a command to assign an address to the lighting device. In further embodiments, instruction comprises a command to operate the light for a duration of time identified by the instruction. For example, a lighting device may receive an instruction to maintain an operation at a current intensity for a specific duration of time. In further embodiments, the instruction identifies a command to turn off a lighting device. The instruction may also identify when to turn off the lighting device. The instruction may include any type and form of command, configuration, request, setting or data needed by the lighting device to implement any function of the lighting system described herein.
0056Still referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref>, controller <b>120</b> is any unit, system, device or component capable of controlling, modulating light emitted or emanated from any light source <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware for controlling, managing or otherwise directing the operation and/or performance of one or more light sources <b>110</b>. Controller <b>120</b> may include any type and form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware embodied in forming instructions or enabling control of one or more light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein. Controller <b>120</b> may include any type and form of executable instructions, including an application, a program, a library, a process, a service, a task or a thread. In one embodiment, controller <b>120</b> provides, includes or controls power output for one or more of light sources <b>110</b>. Herein, terms light emanated from a light source, light produced from a light source or light emitted from a light source may be used interchangeably and may comprise the meaning of any of these terms.
0057In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> is any unit used for controlling one or more light sources <b>110</b>. Sometimes, controller <b>120</b> is any device, system, structure, circuit, piece or hardware or software used for controlling a light source <b>110</b> or any other lighting system component. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises a combination of any device, system structure, circuit, piece of hardware or software, computer program, structure or algorithm used for controlling a light source <b>110</b> or any other lighting system component. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> includes logic, functions or operations to establish, determine, adapt, coordinate, manage or control any characteristics of light emitted from one or more light sources <b>110</b>. In numerous embodiments, controller <b>120</b> includes logic, functions or operations to establish, determine, adapt, coordinate, manage or control any characteristics of any output of any lighting system component. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> controls a light source <b>110</b> which produces a light of a predetermined wavelength. In another embodiment, the controller <b>120</b> directs the light source to emit a light having a wavelength in a predetermined range. In some embodiments, the controller <b>120</b> directs the light source to emanate a light at a predetermined frequency or within a predetermined frequency range. In other embodiments, controller <b>120</b> adjusts one or more characteristics of the light to be emitted or emanated from the light source <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts the color and/or color temperature of the light to emanate from the light source. For example, the color may be established or adjusted based on a color rendering index or value thereof. In another example, the color temperate may be established or adjusted based on a temperature value, such as for example, Kelvin scale. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises functionality for detecting, or detects a duty cycle of a signal.
0058In some embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source <b>110</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a power supply <b>140</b>, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts intensity of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b>. In a number of embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source <b>110</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a power supply <b>140</b>, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts spectral range of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b>. In many embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source <b>110</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a power supply <b>140</b>, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts wavelength of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b>. In numerous embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source <b>110</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a power supply <b>140</b>, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts frequency of pulses of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b>. In certain embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source <b>110</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a power supply <b>140</b>, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts brightness or luminance of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source <b>110</b>, communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a power supply <b>140</b>, controller <b>120</b> establishes or adjusts chromaticity of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b>. In many embodiments, any lighting system <b>100</b> component may comprise any number of other lighting system <b>100</b> components, such as, for example light source <b>110</b>A illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref>. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components comprising other lighting system <b>100</b> components are still controlled, modified, affected or adjusted by other lighting system <b>100</b> components not comprised by them. For example, light source <b>110</b>A in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> having a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A, in some embodiments, is affected, adjusted, modified or controlled by a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>. Similarly, in some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A having a controller <b>120</b>A is affected, adjusted, controlled or modified by a controller <b>120</b> not comprised by light source <b>110</b>A.
0059In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises functionality for detecting an instruction within a duty cycle of a signal. In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises functionality for detecting a time interval associated with a duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> receives, decodes or processes a signal comprising a duty cycle of a time interval or within a time interval. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> receives, decodes or processes an instruction comprised within the duty cycle. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> receives, decodes or processes a duty cycle within a time interval wherein the duty cycle comprises a plurality of separated portions within the time interval. The controller <b>120</b> may detect or process the duty cycle within the time interval regardless if the duty cycle is a single active signal portion within the time interval or a plurality of separated active signal portions within the time interval.
0060In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> receives an information from another lighting system <b>100</b> component and adjusts the output or the light emitted from the light source <b>110</b> in response to the communication or information received. In some embodiments, information received by a controller <b>120</b> or any other lighting system <b>100</b> component comprises any one, or any combination of: a command, a signal, an instruction, a digital or analog code, a pulse, a data bit, a data byte, data or any form of electronic or electrical signal. In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b>A of light source <b>110</b>A receives an information from light source <b>110</b>B or light source <b>110</b>C and changes, amends or adjusts the control of the light source <b>110</b>A in response to the received information. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b>A of light source <b>110</b>A receives an information from any one of communicator <b>125</b>, controller <b>120</b>, power supply <b>140</b> or master/slave addressor <b>130</b> and changes, amends or adjusts the control of light source <b>110</b>A in response to the received information. In certain embodiments, controller <b>120</b>A of light source <b>110</b>A receives an information from any one of communicator <b>125</b>A, address <b>127</b>A, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A and adjusts, changes or amends the control of the light source <b>110</b>A in response to the received information.
0061In some embodiments, the controller <b>120</b> includes a central processing unit (CPU), a memory unit, a power supply and a current driving circuitry for powering and controlling one or more light sources <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises a software application controlling a logic unit for managing the circuitry which powers up or controls one or more light sources <b>110</b> or an array of light sources within the light source <b>110</b>. In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> is a module comprising a CPU or a microprocessor, a memory and a digital logic circuit subsystem associated with control and management of the light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> controls intensity of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b> using electronic circuitry, software, or a combination of electronic circuitry and software of the controller <b>120</b>. In certain embodiments, controller <b>120</b> controls wavelength of the light emitted from a light source <b>110</b> using electronic circuitry, software, or a combination of electronic circuitry and software of the controller <b>120</b>. In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> controls a duty cycle of the intensity varying light emitted from the light source <b>110</b> using hardware, software or a combination of the hardware and software of the controller <b>120</b>. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> controls or modulates the light emitted from light source <b>110</b> using a microprocessor or a processing unit, such as a central processing unit. In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source <b>110</b> using a combination of hardware and software to control or modulate current through the light source <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source <b>110</b> using hardware or software or any combination of hardware or software to control or modulate voltage of light source <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source <b>110</b> using hardware or software or any combination of hardware and software. In a plurality of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> modulates or controls frequency of pulses of light emitted by light source <b>110</b> using hardware or software or any combination of hardware and software.
0062Controller <b>120</b> may include any type and form of device, circuitry or a function for generating a signal to be transmitted to a remote lighting device. Such a component of the controller <b>120</b> may be referred to as a signal generator <b>155</b>. The signal generator may further include a function, component or a device for generating digital patterns. Signal generator <b>155</b> generating data stream of bits forming digital patterns may also be referred to as a digital pattern generator. Signal generator <b>155</b> or the digital pattern generator may generate digital patterns within time intervals or time periods in order to maintain a predetermined intensity of the light to be emitted by the receiving lighting device. The signal generated by the signal generator <b>155</b> may include digital patterns or instructions any number of remote lighting devices. Digital patterns of the signal may include data bits having high and low values. The signal generator <b>155</b> of the controller <b>120</b> may include any type and form of processors, functions or components that generate the signals, including the digital patterns of the signal, such that the total duration of the signal for which the digital patterns have a high value within a predetermined time interval is predetermined. Controller <b>120</b> may generate the signal such that the digital patterns and instructions are included and embedded into the signal. The signal may further be generated to have a ratio of a duration of the signal for which the digital patterns have a high value within a time interval over the total duration of the time interval. The signal may be generated to ensure that this ratio, which may also be referred to as the duty cycle within the time interval, stays at a level indicating the intended intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. This ratio may be included in the signal and remain at the intended level regardless of the instructions or commands for the remote lighting device inserted into the signal. The signal generator of the controller <b>120</b> may include any functionality to generate digital patterns, instructions, or any other component of the signal. The signal generator may embed the digital patterns and the instructions into the signal. In some embodiments, the signal generator <b>155</b> may be comprised by any component of the lighting device <b>110</b>, such as a communicator <b>125</b> for example.
0063Controller <b>120</b> may include any type and form of device, circuitry or a function for filtering or processing the signal received from another lighting system component. Such a component of the controller <b>120</b> may be referred as a signal processor <b>157</b>. The signal processor <b>157</b> may include any type and form of a filter for filtering the signal. The filters may include frequency filter, optical filter, power filter, intensity filter, phase filter or any other type and form of filter for filtering the signal. The signal processor <b>157</b> of the controller <b>120</b> may include circuitry for identifying the duty cycle of the signal within a time interval. The signal processor may determine the duty cycle by determining a sum of all portions of the digital pattern of the signal having a high value within a time interval. In some embodiments, the signal processor determines the duty cycle by determining a ratio of a sum of all durations the digital pattern of the signal within a time interval for which the digital pattern has a high value and the entire duration of the time interval. The signal processor <b>157</b> may use the ratio to establish the percentage of the maximum intensity with which to operate the lighting device. In some embodiments, the signal processor determines an average value of the signal for the time duration of the signal. In further embodiments, the signal processor of the controller <b>120</b> determines a duty cycle by summing all the portions of any number of digital patterns of the signal having a high value within a time interval and establishing a ratio of the sum to a total duration of the time interval. The signal processor <b>157</b> of the controller <b>120</b> may include any functionality to generate digital patterns, instructions, or any other component of the signal. The signal processor <b>157</b> may embed the digital patterns and the instructions into the signal. In some embodiments, the signal processor <b>157</b> may be comprised by any component of the lighting device <b>110</b>, such as a communicator <b>125</b> for example.
0064The controller <b>120</b>, in some embodiments, is a commercial off the shelf system or comprises a commercial off the shelf product, component or a system. In many embodiments, controller <b>120</b> is a customized or a proprietary system for controlling light sources <b>110</b> or any other lighting system components. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> comprises controller components such as control circuits, analog or digital logic circuitry, processors or micro-processors, memory units, software or firmware which individually, or in combination, control the output of a light source <b>110</b>. In a number of embodiments, controller <b>120</b> includes any of the products or modules manufactured or provided by Integrated Illumination Systems, Inc. referred to as I 2 Systems, of Morris, Conn. In some embodiments, controller <b>120</b> includes user interface modules and light source control modules to control and drive one or more light sources <b>110</b>.
0065<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> also displays a stand-alone communicator <b>125</b> connected to other lighting system <b>100</b> components via network <b>104</b>. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> and communicator <b>125</b>A comprise or share any embodiments of any communicator <b>125</b>. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> comprises all the functionality and performance characteristics of communicator <b>125</b>A and vice versa. Communicator <b>125</b>A or any other communicator <b>125</b>, may be any device, unit or a component capable of communicating with any other lighting system <b>100</b> component. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A receives an information from any component inside of light source <b>110</b>A, such as controller <b>120</b>A, address <b>127</b>A, master/slave <b>130</b>A or a power supply <b>140</b>A and in response to the received information transmits an information to any component inside of light source <b>110</b>A or any lighting system <b>100</b> component.
0066In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware for receiving or sending information or communication, processing received information and sending information. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> includes any one of, or any combination of: analog or digital logic circuitry, processing units or microprocessors, memory, hardware or software for receive and processing information, performing and implementing logical functions or algorithms or transmitting information to other lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> includes any one of, or any combination of: analog or digital logic circuitry, processing units or microprocessors, memory, hardware or software for receive and processing information, performing and implementing logical functions or algorithms or transmitting information to other components within light source <b>110</b>A. Communicator <b>125</b> may include any type and form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware embodied in forming instructions or enabling control of one or more light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A or any other communicator <b>125</b> comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein. Communicator <b>125</b>, in some embodiments, includes any type or form of executable instructions, including an application, program, library, process, service, task or thread.
0067In a number of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> detects and processes an instruction within a duty cycle of a signal. In a number of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> detects a time interval associated with a duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> receives, decodes or processes a signal comprising a duty cycle of a time interval or within a time interval. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> receives, decodes or processes an instruction comprised within the duty cycle. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> receives, decodes or processes a duty cycle within a time interval wherein the duty cycle comprises a plurality of separated portions within the time interval. The communicator <b>125</b> may detect or process the duty cycle within the time interval regardless if the duty cycle is a single active signal portion within the time interval or a plurality of separated active signal portions within the time interval.
0068In a number of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A receives all communication or information external to the light source <b>110</b>A and distributes the received communication to any of the components within the light source <b>110</b>A. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A receives all communication or information from outside of light source <b>110</b> and processes, decodes, interprets or reformats the received information. In certain embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A transmits the processed, decoded or interpreted received information to one or more components within the light source <b>110</b>A. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A receives all communication or information from one or more components inside of light source <b>110</b>A and processes, decodes, interprets or reformats the received information. In certain embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A transmits the processed, decoded or interpreted received information to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components, such as another light source <b>110</b> or another communicator <b>125</b> outside of light source <b>110</b>A. It will be understood by those with ordinary skill in the art that communicator <b>125</b>A may comprise all the functionality of any other communicator <b>125</b>, and vice versa.
0069Address <b>127</b>A is an address, piece of data, or a piece of information uniquely identifying a lighting system <b>100</b> component having the address <b>127</b>A from other lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is a number. In many embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is an electronic data, a number, an electronic code, a binary code or a binary number. In a plurality of embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is a piece of electronic information stored in a memory location. In some embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is a setting of a switch or a key. In certain embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is a setting of a logical circuitry set by a user. In a number of embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is a digital signal or a digital code. In a plurality of embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is an internet protocol address.
0070In some embodiments, address <b>127</b> is a unique identifier used for network communication of a lighting system component comprising the address <b>127</b>. In certain embodiments, address <b>127</b> comprises a host name, an internet protocol address or a unique identifier. In a plurality of embodiments, address <b>127</b> is used by a lighting system component comprising the address <b>127</b> to distinguish a message addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of messages. In many embodiments, address <b>127</b> is used by a lighting system component comprising the address <b>127</b> to distinguish an information addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of information. In numerous embodiments, address <b>127</b> is used by a lighting system component comprising the address <b>127</b> to distinguish a communication addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of communications. In some embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is used as a unique network identifier of a lighting system <b>100</b> component comprising the address <b>127</b>A for network communications of the lighting system <b>100</b> component. In a number of embodiments, address <b>127</b>A is used as a unique network identifier of a lighting system <b>100</b> component comprising the address <b>127</b>A for communication between the lighting system <b>100</b> component and a lighting system <b>100</b> component comprising an address <b>127</b> different than an address <b>127</b>A. It will be understood by those with ordinary skill in the art that address <b>127</b>A may comprise all the functionality of any other address <b>127</b>, and vice versa.
0071Master/slave addressor <b>130</b> may be any unit, circuit, device, software or a system capable of setting, resetting or establishing a master or a slave status of any lighting system component. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is any device, unit or a system setting, resetting or establishing a status of a master or a slave of one of lighting system components from a plurality of lighting system components. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is a component independent from any light source <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is a component within a light source <b>110</b> and specifically used by the same light source <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is associated with a specific lighting system component and used by the same specific lighting system component. In numerous embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is associated with a group of lighting system components within a plurality of groups of lighting system components, and is used by the group of lighting system components for setting or resetting the statuses of the lighting systems components within the group. In a number of embodiments, any master/slave addressor <b>130</b> performs any functionality and comprises any embodiments of a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A, and vice versa. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is used interchangeably with master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A.
0072<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> illustrates master/slave addressor <b>130</b> as a lighting system <b>100</b> component while illustrating master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A as a light source <b>110</b>A component. Master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A, in a number of embodiments, is any device, unit, setting, monitoring or recognizing a master or a slave status of light source <b>110</b>A among a plurality of lighting system <b>100</b> components. Master/slave addressor <b>130</b>, in a plurality of embodiments, is any is any device, unit, circuit, software or a system setting, resetting, monitoring or recognizing a master or a slave status of any light source <b>110</b> of a lighting system <b>100</b> among a plurality of light sources <b>110</b> of the lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0073In many embodiments, one lighting system component of a plurality of lighting system components has a status of a master, while all the remaining lighting system components have status of a slave. In numerous embodiments, all lighting system components of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a slave. In a plurality of embodiments, all light sources <b>110</b> of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a slave. In many embodiments, all lighting system components of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a master. In some embodiments, all light sources <b>110</b> of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a master. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a master. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a master and all other lighting system components have a status of a slave. In numerous embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a slave. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a slave and one or more of other lighting system components have a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, plurality of light sources <b>110</b> of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a master or a slave. In some embodiments, all light sources <b>110</b> of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a master or a slave. In certain embodiments, none of light sources <b>110</b> of a lighting system <b>100</b> have a status of a master or a slave. In a number of embodiments, one of a plurality of light sources <b>110</b> has a status of a master and all the remaining lighting system <b>100</b> components have a status of a slave.
0074In some embodiments, a lighting system component having a status of a master controls one or more tasks, actions, functionalities or performances of one or more light sources <b>100</b> having a slave status. Sometimes, a lighting system component having a status of a master controls one or more tasks, actions, functionalities or performances of any lighting system components having a slave status. In many embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> component having a status of a master sends commands or instructions to one or more light sources <b>100</b> having a slave status. In certain embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> component having a status of a master adjusts performance or functionality of one or more components of the lighting system <b>100</b> components having a status of a slave. In many embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> component having a status of a master assigns another component which used to have a status of a slave a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> component having a status of a master assigns a status of a slave to itself or any other lighting system <b>100</b> component. In some embodiments, wherein all of lighting system components have a status of a slave, a status of a master is assigned to one of a plurality of lighting system <b>100</b> components by a lighting system <b>100</b> component having a status of a slave.
0075Still referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref>, power supply <b>140</b> is illustrated as an independent lighting system component. Power supply <b>140</b> may be any component, device, apparatus or a source supplying one of, or any combination of: electrical current, voltage and power, to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> performs any functionality and comprises any embodiments of a power supply <b>140</b>A, and vice versa. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> may be used interchangeably with power supply <b>140</b>A. Power supply <b>140</b> may be a part of any lighting system components. In some embodiments power supply <b>140</b> is comprised by a lighting system component and it supplies any of or any combination of power, current or voltage to the lighting system <b>100</b> component. In a number of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> is a subsystem of a lighting system component and it supplies power, current or voltage to a plurality of lighting system components. In many embodiments, power, current or voltage is transferred or supplied from a power supply <b>140</b> to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components via one or more connections <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> is an electrical outlet supplying electrical current, voltage or power to a lighting system <b>100</b> component, such as a light source <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> comprises a battery. In a number of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> comprises a transformer. In many embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> is a device, system or a unit supplying an alternating current or a current changing through time to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In certain embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a constant current to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies an alternating power or a power changing through time to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a constant power to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies an alternating voltage or a voltage varying through time to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In certain embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a constant voltage to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a plurality of different power, voltage or source signals to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0076Power supply <b>140</b> may comprise any number of the lighting system <b>100</b> components or may be connected to or service any number of lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> allows or enables the power to be transferred between a plurality of lighting system components. In certain embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> transmits, propagates or sends commands and communication to other components of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In numerous embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> receives or accepts commands and communication from other components of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware. In many embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> uses software, hardware or the combination of software and hardware to control, manage or supply power, electrical current or voltage to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> utilizes any one of or any combination of hardware, circuitry, or software to supply, manage or control the flow of current, voltage or power to any one of lighting system <b>100</b> components. Power supply <b>140</b> may comprise any type or form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein.
0077In a number of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies two alternating current signals to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components, first one of the two having a phase different than a second one of the two. In a number of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a constant power signal to one or more lighting system components. In numerous embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a varying power signal to one or more lighting system components. In certain embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a constant current signal to one or more lighting system components. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a constant voltage signal to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a varying current signal, to one or more lighting system components. In certain embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies a varying voltage signal, to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments, power supply <b>140</b> supplies any combination of one or more alternate or constant current signals, alternate or constant voltage signals and alternate or constant power signals to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0078In further reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref>, light source <b>110</b>A may includes any of, or any combination of: a controller <b>120</b>, a communicator <b>125</b>, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> and a power supply <b>140</b>. In many embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A of light source <b>110</b>A comprises an address <b>127</b>A. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A does not comprise an address <b>127</b>A. Light source <b>110</b>A, sometimes, comprises a controller <b>120</b>A which controls functionality, performance or features of light source <b>110</b>A or any other component within the light source <b>110</b>A. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A comprises a controller <b>120</b>A which controls one or more lighting system components. In many embodiments, controller <b>120</b>A is any controller <b>120</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A is any communicator <b>125</b>. In a number of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A is any master/slave addressor <b>130</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply <b>140</b>A is any power supply <b>140</b>.
0079Communicator <b>125</b>A is illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> as a component of light source <b>110</b>A. Communicator <b>125</b>A may communicate or enable communication with any other components of the lighting system <b>100</b>. In a number of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A is a unit or a device communicating with one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A communicates to a plurality of components within light source <b>110</b>A. In a number of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A communicates to other systems or components within any other lighting system component, also referred to as lighting system <b>100</b> component. Communicator <b>125</b>A, in some embodiments, is used for communication between any components within the light source <b>110</b>A or within any other lighting system component. Communicator <b>125</b>A, in a number of embodiments, includes an address <b>127</b> used to uniquely identify a light source <b>110</b>A in a network <b>110</b>. Communicator <b>125</b>A, in many embodiments, uses address <b>127</b> for communication between two or more lighting system components. In a number of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A uses address <b>127</b> to distinguish which information out of a plurality of information reaching the light source <b>110</b> is intended for the light source <b>110</b>A. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A comprises address <b>127</b> which is used for receiving or transmitting information, communication, commands or instructions between the communicator <b>125</b>A and any lighting system component. In many embodiments, communicator <b>125</b>A comprises address <b>127</b> which is used for receiving or transmitting information, communication, commands or instructions between light source <b>110</b>A and any other lighting system component.
0080<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> also illustrates another component of a light source <b>110</b>A, called a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A. A master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A comprises any functionality of any master/slave addressor <b>130</b>, and vice versa. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A controls the status of the light source <b>110</b>A in relation to other lighting system components. In a number of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A receives an instruction from a lighting system component and sets a status of a light source <b>110</b>A to master. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A receives an instruction from a lighting system component and sets a status of a light source <b>110</b>A to a slave. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A sends an instruction to set a status of another lighting system component to a status of a master or a slave. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A receives an information from one of a controller <b>120</b>A, communicator <b>125</b>A, power supply <b>140</b>A or a light source <b>110</b>A and sets a status of another lighting system component to a master or a slave. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A comprises any functionality or embodiments of a controller <b>120</b>, and vice versa. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A comprises any functionality or embodiments of a communicator <b>125</b>, and vice versa. In a number of embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A comprises any functionality or embodiments of a power supply <b>140</b>, and vice versa.
0081In addition to light source <b>110</b>A, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1A</figref> also presents light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C connected to light source <b>110</b>A via network <b>104</b>. Light source <b>110</b>B includes a communicator <b>125</b>B, while light source <b>110</b>C includes controller <b>120</b>C and an address <b>127</b>C. Light source <b>110</b> may comprise any number of components of the lighting system <b>100</b>. Some light sources <b>110</b> sometimes comprise all of components of the lighting system <b>100</b>, while other light sources <b>110</b> do not comprise any of the lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> comprises a plurality of other light sources <b>110</b>. In a number of embodiments, a light source <b>110</b> comprises an array of light sources <b>110</b>. In many embodiments, any of the lighting system <b>100</b> components comprise any of the functionality or embodiments of any other lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, any of the lighting system <b>100</b> components comprise any number of any other lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0082<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1B</figref> uses a block diagram to illustrate other embodiments of environment of a lighting system <b>100</b>. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1B</figref> depicts a lighting system <b>100</b> having a light source <b>110</b>A and light source <b>110</b>B connected to each other and also connected to a power supply <b>140</b> via connections <b>105</b>. Each light source <b>110</b> includes one or more controllers <b>120</b> for controlling features or functionalities of the light source <b>110</b>. Light sources <b>110</b> also include communicators <b>125</b> for communicating to other components of the lighting system <b>100</b> or other light sources <b>110</b>. The communicators <b>125</b> in each of the two light sources <b>110</b> include addresses <b>127</b>. Addresses <b>127</b> comprised by lighting system components are be used, in many configurations, to uniquely identify communications directed to the specific lighting system <b>100</b> components. A light source <b>110</b> also includes a master/slave addressor <b>130</b> for controlling the status of the light source in terms of control within a lighting system <b>110</b>. The power supply <b>140</b> is connected to one or more light sources <b>110</b> and it may be used to provide power or electricity to each of the light sources <b>110</b> or any other component within lighting system <b>100</b>. Connections <b>115</b> connect one or more of components of the lighting system <b>100</b> and allow for the transfer of power or communication between the components of the lighting system <b>100</b>.
0083<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1B</figref> presents a configuration involving light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B connected to each other and a power supply <b>140</b>. In many embodiments, controllers <b>120</b>A and <b>120</b>B control, adjust, modify or affect light emitted or functionality of light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B, respectively. In some embodiments, light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B receive all of their power, voltage or current from power supply <b>140</b>. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A has an address <b>127</b>A which is different from address <b>127</b>B of light source <b>110</b>B. In other embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A has an address <b>127</b>A which is different from address <b>127</b>B of light source <b>110</b>B. In a number of embodiments, light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B communicate with each other using their addresses <b>127</b>. In many embodiments, master/slave addressors <b>130</b>A and <b>130</b>B control, adjust, monitor, set or reset the master or slave status of light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B, respectively. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A having a master status adjusts the status of a light source <b>110</b>B to a status of a master or a slave. In numerous embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A having a master status controls, adjusts or modifies the functionality of a light source <b>110</b>B having a status of a slave. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B having a master status adjusts the status of a light source <b>110</b>A to a status of a master or a slave. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A having a master status controls, adjusts or modifies the functionality of a light source <b>110</b>B having a status of a slave. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A having a master status controls, modifies, affects or governs functionality, performance or light emitted from light source <b>110</b>B. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B has a status of master and a light source <b>110</b>A has a status of a slave, and light source <b>110</b>B controls, modifies, affects or governs functionality, performance or light emitted from light source <b>110</b>A.
0084Still referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1B</figref>, power supply <b>140</b> may sometimes comprise an address <b>127</b>C which is different than address <b>127</b>A and address <b>127</b>B. In a plurality of embodiments, address <b>127</b>C of power supply <b>140</b> is used by the power supply <b>140</b> to communicate with light source <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B. In a number of embodiments, address <b>127</b>C is used for communication between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B and power supply <b>140</b>. Addresses <b>127</b>C, for example, may be used to distinguish information, data or commands directed to the power supply <b>140</b> from the information, data or commands directed to light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B. In many embodiments, light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B and power supply <b>140</b> are connected in any electrical connection configuration. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components are connected in series, in parallel or in a combination of series and parallel configurations. In some embodiments, information transmitted between lighting system components comprises an address <b>127</b> of a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component the transmitted information is intended for. In some embodiments, light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B and power supply <b>140</b> are connected in series and information transmitted comprising an instruction, a command or data is accessible to all three lighting system <b>100</b> components while the address <b>127</b> within the information transmitted defines which of the lighting system <b>100</b> components is the information addressed to.
0085In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A transmits an information via connection <b>105</b> which connects light source <b>110</b>A with light source <b>110</b>B and power supply <b>140</b>. The information transmitted by the light source <b>110</b>A sometimes comprises instructions, commands, data and an address <b>127</b>B. The communicator <b>125</b>B of the light source <b>110</b>B may receive the address <b>127</b>B from the transmitted information and confirm that it matches with address <b>127</b>B of the communicator <b>125</b>B. The communicator <b>125</b>B, in response to the confirmed match, then may receive the entire transmitted information.
0086In many embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> performs all functionality of a communicator <b>125</b>, or vice versa. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b> performs all functionality of a master/slave addressor <b>130</b> or a communicator <b>125</b>, and vice versa. In a plurality of embodiments, any lighting system <b>100</b> components performs any functionality of any other lighting system <b>100</b> component, and vice versa. In many embodiments, any subcomponent of a lighting system <b>100</b> component performs any functionality of any other lighting system <b>100</b> component, and vice versa. In certain embodiments, any subcomponent of a lighting system <b>100</b> component performs any functionality of any other subcomponent of a lighting system <b>100</b> component, and vice versa.
0087Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1C</figref> embodiments of systems and methods for digital communication of lighting system components is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1C</figref> presents light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C connected to each other via connections <b>105</b>. Connection <b>105</b> is illustrated as a shaded region within which connection <b>105</b> components are comprised. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a wire or a cable harness comprising an enclosure enclosing three separate wires or three electrical conducting lines. Each of the three separate wires or conducting lines may sometimes be referred to as connection <b>105</b> components. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1C</figref> illustrates connection <b>105</b> components: connection <b>105</b>A, connection <b>105</b>B and connection <b>105</b>C, as independent conducting lines propagating through the connection <b>105</b>. Connection <b>105</b>, however, may also be a wireless communication link. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> is a wireless communication band comprising a number of wireless communication links. Illustrated as separated from each other, connection <b>105</b> components are shown as electrically insulated from each other or mutually independent. In some embodiments, however, connection <b>105</b> components are not electrically insulated from each other and are not mutually independent. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1C</figref> depicts connection <b>105</b>A marked with a bold line, a connection <b>105</b>B with a dashed line and a connection <b>105</b>C illustrated with a thin non-dashed line. Herein, the terms connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>C and the term connection <b>105</b> components may sometimes be used interchangeably.
0088One or more connections <b>105</b> may be used as means for transmitting communication between a plurality of lighting system components, such as light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C. In some embodiments, connections <b>105</b> connect all of the lighting system components within a lighting system <b>100</b>. In a number of embodiments, one or more connection <b>105</b> components, such as connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>C connect two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, all connection <b>105</b> components connect two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a plurality of embodiments, all connection <b>105</b> components connect all of the lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises any number of connection <b>105</b> components connecting any number of lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0089Sometimes, connection <b>105</b> components transmit electrical current, voltage or power between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises one or more connection <b>105</b> components transmitting information or communication between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises one or more connection <b>105</b> components which serve as mediums or means for delivering, supplying or transmitting electrical current, power or voltage to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises one or more connection <b>105</b> components which serve as mediums or means for delivering, supplying or transmitting information transmitted between the lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0090Connection <b>105</b> components, such as connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B or <b>105</b>C are, in many embodiments, means for delivering electrical power, voltage or current together with electronic analog or digital communication signals. In a number of embodiments, one or more connection <b>105</b> components are means through which electrical power is delivered to a lighting system <b>100</b> component along with analog or digital information or communication. In a plurality of embodiments, two or more lighting system components are connected to each other via one or more connections <b>105</b> or one or more components of connections <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> components are means, paths or mediums through which electrical power, voltage or current is transmitted to a group of lighting system <b>100</b> components. Sometimes, connection <b>105</b> components are means, paths or mediums through which electrical power, voltage, current or information is transmitted to a lighting system <b>100</b>. In a number of embodiments, one or more connection <b>105</b> components are means, paths or mediums through which analog or digital information is transmitted between the two or more lighting system components. The connection <b>105</b> components may also comprise means, paths or mediums through which wireless information is transmitted between the two or more lighting system components.
0091In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A comprises a power supply <b>140</b> and light source <b>110</b>A provides electrical power to light source <b>110</b>B via one or more connection <b>105</b> components. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A supplies power to light source <b>110</b>B via connections <b>105</b>A and <b>105</b>B, while providing information, such as digital communication for example, via connection <b>105</b>C. In a some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A supplies power to light source <b>110</b>B via connections <b>105</b>A and <b>105</b>B while receiving information or communication from light source <b>110</b>B. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A communicates with light source <b>110</b>C and light source <b>110</b>B via connection <b>105</b>C. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A provides electrical power to light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via connections <b>105</b>A and <b>105</b>B, while communicating with light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via connection <b>105</b>C. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A provides electrical power to light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via connections <b>105</b>A and <b>105</b>B, while light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C communicate to each other via connection <b>105</b>C. In many embodiments, any one or more of light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C provide electrical power to any one or more of light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via any one or more of connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B, or <b>105</b>C while light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C communicate to each other via any one of connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B or <b>105</b>C.
0092In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A comprises a power supply <b>140</b> and provides light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C with electrical power via connections <b>105</b>A and <b>105</b>B. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A comprises a power supply <b>140</b> and provides electrical power and communication to light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via any combination of connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>C. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A comprises a power supply <b>140</b> and provides light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C with electrical power via connections <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>C, while light source <b>110</b>A communicates with light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via connections <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>A. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B, comprising a power supply <b>140</b>, provides light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>C with electrical power via connections <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>C, while light source <b>110</b>A communicates with light sources <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via connections <b>105</b>B and <b>105</b>A. In a number of embodiments, any one or more of light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C provides electrical power to any one or more of light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C via any one or more of connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B, or <b>105</b>C while light sources <b>110</b>A, <b>110</b>B and <b>110</b>C communicate to each other via any one or more of connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B or <b>105</b>C.
0093<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1D</figref> presents an embodiment of connection <b>105</b> comprising connection <b>105</b> components used for transmission of electrical power and digital data. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1D</figref> illustrates a light source <b>110</b>A having a controller <b>120</b>A, a communicator <b>125</b>A with an address <b>127</b>A and a master slave <b>130</b>A. Light source <b>110</b>A is connected to by connection <b>105</b> which comprises connection <b>105</b>A, connection <b>105</b>B and connection <b>105</b>C. Connection <b>105</b>A is also labeled as VAC or V+. Connection <b>105</b>B is also labeled Ground, which can sometimes be referred to as electrical ground or a ground potential wire. Connection <b>105</b>C, in many cases, may be labeled as a neutral, a control, or a control line.
0094Connection <b>105</b>A, may sometimes be used for transmitting or propagating alternate voltage or voltage varying through time. Sometimes, connection <b>105</b> is also used for transmitting or propagating alternate current or power or current or power varying through time. Connection <b>105</b>A, in some embodiments, is used for transmission or propagation of a constant voltage which is positive relative to ground. In such cases, the connection <b>105</b>A may be labeled V+. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>A is also used for transmission or propagation of a negative voltage potential relative to ground. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>A is a medium through which constant power, constant current or constant voltage are propagated or transmitted. Connection <b>105</b>B is also labeled Ground, and is sometimes used for transmission or propagation of electrical ground or a ground potential. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> B is used for same purposes as connection <b>105</b>A. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b> B is used for grounding and has a zero voltage potential relative to ground. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b>B is a medium through which alternate voltage or constant voltage, alternate or constant current or alternate or constant power signals are propagated or transmitted. Connection <b>105</b>C is sometimes used as a neutral wire which may have any potential relative to ground, or zero potential relative to ground. Connection <b>105</b>C is sometimes used as a control wire or a control line which may have any potential relative to ground, or not have any potential relative to ground. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a control line used as a medium through which lighting system <b>100</b> components send information, controls, signals, commands or instructions among each other. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C performs all the functionality of connection <b>105</b>A. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C performs all the functionality of connection <b>105</b>B.
0095Connection <b>105</b>C is sometimes used for transmission or propagation of electronic signals. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium or a means for transmitting or propagating a digital electronic signal. In various embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a control line connecting two or more light sources <b>110</b> or any other lighting system components. Sometimes, connection <b>105</b>C is a wireless communication link between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a control line or a control wire connecting two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a control line used as a medium through which information, instructions, signals or commands are propagated between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In a plurality of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium or means for transmitting or propagating an analog electronic signal.
0096In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which digital or analog information or data is transmitted or propagated. Digital data sometimes comprises a high voltage level and a low voltage level which defines communication transmitted as binary values of 1 or 0, respectively. In some embodiments, a signal comprises a high value, or a 1, which is defined by a predetermined threshold having a predetermined voltage value. The voltage of the signal may cross above the voltage value of the predetermined threshold resulting in the signal having a high value, or a value of 1. In some embodiments, a signal comprises a low value, or a 0, which is defined by a predetermined threshold having a predetermined voltage value. The voltage of the signal may cross below the voltage value of the predetermined threshold resulting in the signal having a low value, or a value of 0. In some embodiments, a signal has only one threshold value defining a low and a high value of the signal, the signals below the threshold value being low, or 0, and signals above the threshold value being high, or 1. In a number of embodiments, digital data transmitted via connection <b>105</b>C comprises digital representation of bits. In a plurality of embodiments, digital data transmitted through connection <b>105</b>C comprises digital representation of pluralities of bits or bytes. In a number of embodiments, digital data transmitted via connection <b>105</b>C comprises square waves, wherein the low value of the square wave equals the low voltage value and the high value of the square wave equals a high voltage value. In many embodiments, digital data transmitted via connection <b>105</b>C comprises square waves wherein the low value of the square wave equals zero volts and the high value of the square wave equals any positive voltage value, such as three volts or five volts, for example.
0097Connection <b>105</b> may comprise any number connection <b>105</b> components, such as connection <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B through <b>105</b>N where N is any number. Any of connection <b>105</b> components of the connection <b>105</b> may be a wire, a conductor line, a wireless link, a frequency range for a wireless signal, a fiber optic or any other medium capable of transmitting a signal. Any one of the connection <b>105</b> components may comprise a control signal or a return for a control signal. In some embodiments, a connection <b>105</b> component is a control line. Sometimes, a connection <b>105</b> component is a return line. Sometimes, a connection <b>105</b> is a differential line wherein one line of the connection <b>105</b> comprises a voltage above a certain threshold and another line of the connection <b>105</b> comprises a voltage below a certain threshold. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b> comprises any number of connection <b>105</b> components which may be dedicated to transmitting any one or any number of signals from any components of lighting system <b>100</b>.
0098Digital data, such as data bits <b>215</b> may be generated using any device capable of generating signals. Sometimes, a controller <b>120</b> or a communicator <b>125</b> generates signals which are transmitted to other lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, a controller <b>120</b> receives or processes signals from other devices <b>110</b> and generates or sends signals to other devices <b>110</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, a communicator <b>125</b> receives or processes from other devices <b>110</b> and generates or sends signals to other devices <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, digital data may be generated using a phase control dimmer for example. In a number of embodiments, a device generating a pulsed waveform may be combined with a circuitry clipping top portions of the waveform and creating digital bits using portions of the clipped waveform. In many embodiments, a device producing a square-wave waveform may be used in conjunction with an electronic circuit which controls or adjusts the waveform to produce bits of digital signal, such as data bits <b>215</b> for example. Digital data may be produced or generated using any electronic signal generating device providing means for generating a digital signal having high values corresponding to digital value of 1 (one) and low values corresponding to a digital value of a 0 (zero). In some embodiments, digital signal having high and low values may resemble a square wave having sharp edges. In other embodiments, digital signal may comprise portions of waveforms having rounded edges.
0099In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which pulse width modulated information is propagated. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which pulse code modulated data is propagated or transmitted. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which pulse density modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In a number of embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which pulse amplitude modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In some embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which pulse position modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In many embodiments, connection <b>105</b>C is a medium through which sigma delta modulated data is transmitted or propagated. Connection <b>105</b>C may be used as a medium through which any type of an electronic or electrical signal is propagated. The propagated signal may be a digital signal of any modulation, such as frequency or phase modulation, amplitude modulation, pulse width modulation or any other type of modulation available. In some embodiments, any one of connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B or <b>105</b>C can be used interchangeably with any other connection <b>105</b> or any other connection <b>105</b> component, such as connections <b>105</b>A, <b>105</b>B or <b>105</b>C.
B. Communication Between Lighting System Components
0100Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref>, an embodiment of communication between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> depicts devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B, also referred to as light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B, connected to each other via connection <b>105</b>. Connection <b>105</b> may be used by light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B as a medium for transmission of communication between the light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> also illustrates a signal transmitted and represented as data <b>210</b>. Data <b>210</b> may be transmitted via a connection <b>105</b> and may comprise a plurality of data bits <b>215</b>. In some instances, active portions of the signal, such as data bits <b>215</b> having high values may define a duty cycle of the signal. Data <b>210</b> illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> comprises five data bits <b>215</b> having high values grouped together. Time Interval <b>205</b>, also referred to as a period <b>205</b>, is a time interval within which portions of data <b>210</b> are transmitted via communication <b>105</b>. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> presents an embodiment showing two time intervals <b>205</b>, each time interval <b>205</b>, also known as period <b>205</b>, having a group of data <b>210</b> comprising an equal amount of bits <b>215</b> having a high value. Amount of bits transmitted within each time interval <b>205</b> may vary between different embodiments or different applications.
0101Data <b>210</b> may be any information, communication, instruction or data transmitted via connection <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises a digital signal. In a plurality of embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises an analog signal. In some embodiment, data <b>210</b> comprises a mix of an analog or a digital signal. In a number of embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises a square wave signal. In many embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises a pulse. In some embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises a pulse width modulated signal or data. In a plurality of embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises a pulse amplitude modulated data or signal. In some embodiments, the data <b>210</b> is a wirelessly communicated digital data. In numerous embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises data which is encoded using a binary system and comprises only high values and low values. In some embodiments, high value corresponds to a square-shaped signal whose peak is flat over a period of time and has a value of voltage which is higher than a square-shaped signal of a low value. In a number of embodiments, low value corresponds to a square-shaped wave whose lowest point is flat over a period of time and has a value of voltage which is lower than a square-shaped signal of a high value.
0102Duty cycle of a signal may be any ratio or fraction of a time interval <b>205</b> in an active state. The active state may be any state of bits of data <b>210</b> or any portions of the signal which may have high values or low values. In some embodiments, active state comprises bits of data <b>210</b> having high values, or values equivalent to digital value of 1. In other embodiments, active state comprises bits of data <b>210</b> having low values, or values equivalent to digital value of 0. Duty cycle may be a ratio of a portion of a time interval <b>205</b> for which the signal comprises high values, such as a digital value of 1, to a duration of that same the whole time interval <b>205</b>. For example, a duty cycle for a time interval <b>205</b> of 1 millisecond may be a ratio of a fraction of the period <b>205</b> for which data bits <b>210</b> have a value of 1, e.g. for which the signal is high, to the whole duration period of the time interval <b>205</b>, e.g. 1 millisecond. In some embodiments, duty cycle is a ratio of time interval <b>205</b> for which the signal has low values, or values of 0, to the entire duration of the whole same time interval <b>205</b>. In another example, a duty cycle for a time interval <b>205</b> of 1 millisecond may be a ratio of a fraction of the period <b>205</b> for which data bits <b>210</b> have a value of 0, e.g. for which the signal is low, to the whole duration period of the time interval <b>205</b>, e.g. 1 millisecond. In a number of embodiments, data <b>210</b> comprises bits or portions of signal having high values within a time interval <b>205</b>, and the bits or portions of signal having high values within the time interval <b>205</b> define a duty cycle of the signal or a duty cycle of the time interval <b>205</b>. Sometimes, data <b>210</b> comprises bits or portions of signal having low values within a time interval <b>205</b>, and the bits or portions of signal having low values within the time interval <b>205</b> define a duty cycle of the signal or a duty cycle of the time interval <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, duty cycle of a signal within a time interval <b>205</b> is defined by a total amount of bits or portions of the signal having high values and transmitted with the time interval <b>205</b>, regardless if the portions are separated or bunched together. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal within a time interval <b>205</b> is defined by a total amount of bits or portions of the signal having low values and transmitted with the time interval <b>205</b>, regardless if the portions are separated or bunched together. The duty cycle may include a ratio of a duration of a period <b>205</b> for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire period <b>205</b>. The duty cycle of a period <b>205</b> may further include an average value of the signal within the period <b>205</b>.
0103In a number of embodiments, data <b>210</b> is transmitted via connection <b>105</b> in respect to the time interval <b>205</b>. Sometimes, time interval <b>205</b> is a predetermined period of time within which a communication or an information comprising a specified amount of data bits is transmitted over a connection <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, time interval <b>205</b>, also referred to as period <b>205</b>, is a period of time within which a communication or an information comprising an unspecified amount of data bits is transmitted over a connection <b>105</b>. In a number of embodiments, data <b>210</b> is a predetermined amount of data transmitted between light source <b>110</b>A and light source <b>110</b>B within a time range defined by the period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, data <b>210</b> is an amount of data having a predetermined amount of bits having a high or a low value transmitted through connection <b>105</b> within a time range defined by a period <b>205</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B remains constant for a plurality of periods, or time intervals <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, data <b>210</b> having portions having a high value may remain constant through a plurality of time intervals <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B in a first period <b>205</b> is different than data <b>210</b> transmitted between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B in a second period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, data <b>210</b> transmitted between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B via connection <b>105</b> has a constant amount of bits through plurality of periods <b>205</b>. Sometimes, data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B via connection <b>105</b> has a constant amount of bits having a high value through plurality of periods <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B via connection <b>105</b> has a constant amount of bits having a low value through plurality of periods <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B via connection <b>105</b> comprises an amount of bits transmitted within a first period <b>205</b> which is different than the amount of bits transmitted within a second period <b>205</b>. Data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B may also comprise an amount of bits having a high value transmitted within a first time interval <b>205</b> different than the amount of bits having a high value transmitted within a second time interval <b>205</b>. Similarly, data <b>210</b> transmitted between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B may also comprise an amount of bits having a low value transmitted within a first time interval <b>205</b> different than the amount of bits having a low value transmitted within a second time interval <b>205</b>.
0104In a number of embodiments, time interval <b>205</b>, or a period <b>205</b>, is a predetermined period or a duration of time. In a plurality of embodiments, period <b>205</b> is constant period or a duration of time. In many embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a changing or undetermined period of time. In many embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a period of time or a duration of time determined by data <b>210</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a period of time or a duration of time determined by one or more data bits <b>215</b>. In many embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a period of time or a duration of time determined by light source <b>110</b>A. In some embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a period of time or a duration of time determined by light source <b>110</b>B. In many embodiments, period <b>205</b> is period of time or a duration of time determined by any lighting system <b>100</b> component. In a plurality of embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a period of time or a duration of time determined by a clock or a circuit. In some embodiments, period <b>205</b> is a period of time within which a predetermined amount of information such as one or more bits <b>215</b> is transmitted.
0105In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving information or a signal determines period <b>205</b> based on the statistics of previous periods <b>205</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving information or a signal anticipates a next period <b>205</b> based on the duration of a previous period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving information or a signal anticipates a period <b>205</b> based on an algorithm which uses durations of previous periods <b>205</b> to determine the next period <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving information or a signal anticipates a period <b>205</b> based on a weighted statistics of recently arrived periods <b>205</b> or cycles of information. In many embodiments, one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components maintains statistics such as average data bits per period <b>205</b>, tolerance for variation of a period <b>205</b>, or duration of periods <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, statistics relating periods <b>205</b> or data bits <b>215</b> maintained by one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components are used to anticipate or predict the next period <b>205</b>.
0106In some embodiments, time interval <b>205</b>, or a period <b>205</b>, is a period of time determined by an event or a signal. In a plurality of embodiments, a first period <b>205</b> is immediately followed by a second period <b>205</b> and a time duration of the first period <b>205</b> is different from a time duration of the second period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, a first period <b>205</b> is immediately followed by a second period <b>205</b> and a time duration of the first period <b>205</b> is the same as the time duration of the second period <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, a number of data bits <b>215</b> transmitted via connection <b>105</b> within a period <b>205</b> is predetermined. In a plurality of embodiments, a number of data bits <b>215</b> transmitted within a first period <b>205</b> is same as a number of data bits <b>215</b> transmitted within a second period <b>205</b>, the second period immediately following the first. In many embodiments, a number of data bits <b>215</b> transmitted within a first period <b>205</b> is different from a number of data bits <b>215</b> transmitted within a second period <b>205</b>, the second period immediately following the first. In some embodiments, time duration of period <b>205</b> in a first connection <b>105</b> component, such as connection <b>105</b>B, is different from a time duration of a period <b>205</b> in a second connection <b>105</b> component, such as connection <b>105</b>C. In many embodiments, time duration of a period <b>205</b> relating an information transmitted by a first connection <b>105</b> component is the same as a time duration of a period <b>205</b> relating an information transmitted by a second connection <b>105</b> component. In some embodiments, one or more connection <b>105</b> components do not have a period <b>205</b>.
0107Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> another embodiment of communication between devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> presents devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B connected to each other via connection <b>105</b>. Connection <b>105</b> is used by the devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B as a medium of communication between the light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> also illustrates data <b>210</b> transmitted via connection <b>105</b>. In comparison to the embodiment illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref>, the embodiments illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> shows data bits <b>215</b> spread out through the time interval, or the period <b>205</b>. Time intervals <b>205</b> and an amount of 215 data bits having a high value in each time interval <b>205</b> remain the same in the embodiments depicted <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref>, illustrating a same or a similar duty cycle for both embodiments. Some data bits <b>215</b>, however, are also marked as instruction bits <b>220</b>, and may be used for a variety of communication related purposes, such as instructions or commands.
0108Still referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref>, data bits <b>215</b> are spread out through the period <b>205</b>. First period <b>205</b>, in some embodiments, comprises data bits <b>215</b> spaced out differently than data bits <b>215</b> in second period <b>205</b>, the second period <b>205</b> immediately following the first period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, first period <b>205</b> comprises data bits <b>215</b> having a high or a low value spaced out differently than data bits <b>215</b> in second period <b>205</b> having a high or a low value, the second period <b>205</b> immediately following the first period <b>205</b>. When two periods comprise a same amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a high value, which includes instruction bits <b>220</b>, then the two periods may have a same duty cycle. Similarly, when two periods comprise a same amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a low value, which includes instruction bits <b>220</b>, then the two periods may also have a same duty cycle.
0109Sometimes, data bits <b>215</b> may be transmitted within a specific time range within period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, some data bits <b>215</b> having a high or a low value are transmitted outside of a specific time range within period <b>205</b> and other data bits <b>215</b> are transmitted within the specific time range within period <b>205</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> having a high or a low value are transmitted outside of a specific time range within period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, a specific time range within period <b>205</b> is predetermined by any lighting system <b>100</b> component. In a plurality of embodiments, a specific time range is always within a same time period for any period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, a specific time range within a first <b>205</b> period is within a different time period than a second specific time range of a second <b>205</b> period, the second period <b>205</b> immediately following the first period <b>205</b>.
0110Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> together, combinations of two embodiments of communication between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B are discussed. In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> data bits <b>215</b> having a high value are sequentially combined together and data <b>210</b> therefore resembles a periodic square wave having high value during a first portion of period <b>205</b> and a low value during the remainder of period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, a first bit <b>215</b>, which may or may not be instruction bit <b>220</b>, of data <b>210</b> within period <b>205</b> triggers or causes the period <b>205</b> to start. In many embodiments, a first bit <b>215</b>, which may or may not be instruction bit <b>220</b>, of data <b>210</b> within period <b>205</b> is aligned with period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components uses the first bit <b>215</b> of data <b>210</b> within period <b>205</b> to define the beginning of a new period <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components uses the last bit <b>215</b> of data <b>210</b> within period <b>205</b> to define beginning or end of period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, one or more lighting system components uses one or more bits <b>215</b> of period <b>205</b> to define a specific part of period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, communication or information between one or more lighting system components is transmitted within the specific part of period <b>205</b> defined by one or more bits <b>215</b> of period <b>205</b>. In embodiments in which data <b>210</b> or data bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> are transmitted wirelessly, periods <b>205</b>, <b>305</b> or <b>315</b> may be periods of time within which an amount of data is wirelessly transmitted.
0111In a plurality of embodiments, one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components use one or more bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> of data <b>210</b> within a period <b>205</b> to synchronize communication, transmission of communication or information transmitted via connection <b>105</b>. In many embodiments, one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components use one or more bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> of data <b>210</b> within a period <b>205</b> to specify a timing within period <b>205</b> within which communication or information between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components is transmitted. In a plurality of embodiments, one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components communicate information within a part of a period <b>205</b> which is defined by one or more bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> of data <b>210</b> within the period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, one or more bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> within period <b>205</b> are used to identify a specific time period within any of a plurality of 205 periods, wherein the specific time period is a period within which communication between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components takes place. In some embodiments, one or more bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> within period <b>205</b> are used to identify a specific time period within any of a plurality of concatenated <b>205</b> periods. The specific time period is sometimes designated for communication between two or more lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0112<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 2A and 2B</figref> illustrate an embodiment wherein information relating intensity of light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B is transmitted over a connection <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source <b>110</b>B regarding intensity of light emitted by light source <b>110</b>A. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b> may be sending any information including information relating: humidity of a room, temperature of a light source <b>110</b>, temperature of a room, presence of a person in a room, intensity of a light, color of a light or more. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source <b>110</b>B regarding intensity or color of light emitted by light source <b>110</b>B. In a some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source <b>110</b>A regarding temperature or any other characteristic relating specifically to light source <b>110</b>A. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source <b>110</b>A regarding intensity of light emitted by light source <b>110</b>B.
0113In some embodiments, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> depicts an embodiment wherein light source <b>110</b>B is sending five 215 bits having a high value or a value of 1, to light source <b>110</b>. The five 215 bits communicated within period <b>205</b> having a high value, in some embodiments, specifies an amount of intensity light source <b>110</b>A should emit. In many embodiments, the amount of bits <b>215</b> within a period <b>205</b> having a high value, or a value of 1, is proportional to the intensity of light to be emitted. In a number of embodiments, an instruction comprising an amount of bits <b>215</b> having a high value of a value of 1, within a period <b>205</b> specifies an intensity a light source <b>110</b> receiving the instruction should emit. In a number of embodiments, the higher the proportion of bits <b>215</b> having a high value within a period <b>205</b>, the higher the intensity of the light to be emitted. In a plurality of embodiments, an amount of bits transmitted by light source <b>110</b>B to light source <b>110</b>A signifies an instruction for light source <b>110</b>A to emit a specific intensity of light as specified by the amount of bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> transmitted. In a number of embodiments, bits transmitted by light source <b>110</b>B to light source <b>110</b>A signify an instruction for light source <b>110</b>A to emit a specific intensity of light as specified by the bits transmitted.
0114In many embodiments, a total amount of bits <b>215</b> having a high value within a period <b>205</b>, transmitted by light source <b>110</b>B to light source <b>110</b>A, is an instruction for light source <b>110</b>A to emit. In many embodiments, a total amount of bits <b>215</b> having a low value within a period <b>205</b>, transmitted by light source <b>110</b>B to light source <b>110</b>A, is an instruction for light source <b>110</b>A to emit. In a plurality of embodiments, amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a value of 1 within a period <b>205</b> transmitted by light source <b>110</b>B indicates or signifies intensity of light source <b>110</b>A. In some embodiments, amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a value of 0 within a period <b>205</b> transmitted by light source <b>110</b>B indicates or signifies the intensity of light source <b>110</b>A.
0115In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> light source <b>110</b>B transmits five bits <b>215</b> within each period <b>205</b>, wherein the five bits specifies intensity with which light source <b>110</b>A should emit light. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> also illustrates five bits <b>215</b> of data <b>210</b> within period <b>205</b> positioned at the beginning of each period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, all bits <b>215</b> positioned at the beginning of period <b>205</b> specify intensity of light but do not carry any additional information. In a number of embodiments, five bits <b>215</b> positioned at the beginning of period <b>205</b> specify the beginning of a period <b>205</b>.
0116In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref>, five bits <b>215</b> are spread out within period <b>205</b>, wherein first two bits <b>215</b> are at the beginning of each period <b>205</b> and remaining bits <b>215</b>, also referred to as instruction bits <b>220</b>, are spread out within a latter portion of period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, wherein the instruction bits <b>220</b> are spread out within a latter portion of period <b>205</b>, the instruction bits <b>220</b> signify information which is not related to intensity of light. In many embodiments, wherein the instruction bits <b>220</b> are spread out within a latter portion of period <b>205</b>, the instruction bits <b>220</b> signify information which are related to intensity of light as well as another information transmitted to the lighting system component. In a plurality of embodiments, wherein the instruction bits <b>220</b> are spread out within a latter portion of period <b>205</b>, the instruction bits <b>220</b> signify an instruction to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In many embodiments, wherein the instruction bits <b>220</b> are spread out within a latter portion of period <b>205</b>, the instruction bits <b>220</b> are information transmitted to one more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are bits <b>215</b> spread out through any part or portion of a period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are bits <b>215</b> performing a specific task. In a variety of embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are bits <b>215</b> are data <b>210</b> emitted by a lighting system <b>100</b> component which sends an information within a specific time frame within period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are data <b>210</b> emitted within any one or more sections or portions of period <b>205</b>.
0117In many embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> spread out within a latter portion of period <b>205</b> are referred to as the instruction bits <b>220</b>. In a number of embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> spread out within a first portion of period <b>205</b> are referred to as the instruction bits <b>220</b>. Instruction bits <b>220</b>, in some embodiments form an address of a lighting system <b>100</b> component. In many embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form a command or an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to change status from master to slave. In a plurality of embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are a part of an instruction or a command addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to change status from slave to master. In many embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component relating control of the specific lighting system <b>100</b> component. In a number of embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to change a spectral range of light emitted.
0118In a plurality of embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to change, adjust or amend intensity of light emitted. In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to maintain or confirm intensity of light emitted. In many embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to adjust address <b>127</b> of the lighting system <b>100</b> component. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to turn the lighting system <b>100</b> component on. In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to start emitting light. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to turn the lighting system <b>100</b> component off. In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to stop emitting light. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to turn the lighting system <b>100</b> component on. In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form an information, instruction or command addressed to a specific lighting system <b>100</b> component to perform a task, an action or an adjustment of any kind.
0119In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are positioned in a very first portion of period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are positioned in central or middle portion of period <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are positioned in last or final portion of period <b>205</b>. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> are transmitted within any portion of period <b>205</b> or within a plurality of portions of period <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, the portion of period <b>205</b> within which instruction bits <b>220</b> are transmitted remains the same for all periods <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, the portion of period <b>205</b> within which instruction bits <b>22</b> are transmitted varies between periods <b>205</b>.
0120<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> also illustrate how a lighting system <b>100</b> component, in some embodiments, maintains a same light intensity regardless of whether data <b>210</b> is in a group or dispersed through period <b>205</b>. As illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref>, in some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B transmits an amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a high value within a period <b>205</b> to light source <b>110</b>A to indicate a light intensity light source <b>110</b>A should emit light with. In some embodiments, as illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref>, light source <b>110</b>B transmits the same amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a high value within the period <b>205</b> as in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref>, while transmitting instruction bits <b>220</b> further specifying additional information to light source <b>110</b>A. In such embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B is sometimes a master sending instructions to a slave light source <b>110</b>A. Light source <b>110</b>B, in some embodiments, maintains the same intensity of light source <b>110</b>A while sending additional information to light source <b>110</b>A. The additional information may be any information, such as instructions, commands, settings, calibrations, tasks, actions, statuses or any other information light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B are capable of communicating.
0121In some embodiments, it is a position of data bits <b>220</b>, or instruction bits <b>220</b>, in relation to the period <b>205</b> which defines the instruction or information transmitted by instruction bits <b>220</b>. In a number of embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form or define a digital instruction, such as a digital number, a digital sequence of values or a digital value pattern. In a plurality of embodiments, information comprises data bits <b>215</b> which are not instruction bits <b>220</b>, wherein data bits <b>215</b> are positioned within a specific portion of period <b>205</b> and signify intensity of light to be emitted by light source <b>110</b> receiving the information. In numerous embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> which are not instruction bits <b>220</b>, transmitted within a period <b>205</b> and comprising both bits <b>215</b> and bits <b>220</b>, form or define information relating intensity of light to be emitted by a light source <b>110</b> receiving the information. In many embodiments, information relating intensity of light to be emitted by the light source <b>110</b> is a command or an instruction indicating the intensity of light the light source <b>110</b> will emit. In some embodiments, information relating intensity of light to be emitted by the light source <b>110</b> is a command or an instruction indicating to turn light source <b>110</b> on or off. In some embodiments, instruction bits <b>220</b> form or define an information or instruction which is different from an instruction relating intensity of light for a lighting system <b>100</b> device.
0122In some embodiments, information transmitted by data bits <b>215</b> is digital communication information. In a number of embodiments, information transmitted by instruction bits <b>220</b> is digital communication information. In a plurality of embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> comprise digital communication. In many embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> comprise one or more digital values of 0's and 1's. In many embodiments, bits <b>215</b> are digital communication wherein digital value of 1 is marked by a square wave having a height signifying a digital value of 1 and a square wave having a lack of height signifying a digital value of 0. In many embodiments, height of the square wave is defined by a voltage signal, such as a voltage step or a voltage impulse. In a plurality of embodiments, data bits <b>215</b> are digital communication wherein digital value of 0 is marked by a square-like wave having a height and a digital value of 0 is marked by a lack of a square-like wave. In a plurality of embodiments, high to low transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies a data bit <b>210</b>, a bit <b>215</b> or a bit <b>220</b>. In a number of embodiments, low to high transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies a data bit <b>210</b>, a bit <b>215</b> or bit <b>220</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, a missing, or a lack of, high to low transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies a data bit <b>210</b>, a bit <b>215</b> or a bit <b>220</b>. In a number of embodiments, a missing, or a lack of, low to high transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies a data bit <b>210</b>, a bit <b>215</b> or bit <b>220</b>.
0123Duty cycle of period <b>205</b>, in some embodiments, is defined as amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a value of 1 within a period <b>205</b>. Duty cycle of period <b>205</b>, in other embodiments, is defined as amount of data bits <b>215</b> having a value of 0 within a period <b>205</b>. Duty cycle of period <b>205</b>, in many embodiments, is defined as amount of data bits <b>215</b> having any value. In many embodiments, duty cycle of period <b>205</b> signifies or defines intensity light source <b>110</b> should emit light with. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B with a master status transmits information to light source <b>110</b>A with a slave status, wherein duty cycle of period <b>205</b> of the transmitted information signal, signifies or defines intensity instructions for light source <b>110</b>A. Light source <b>110</b>A, in some embodiments, in response to the duty cycle of period <b>205</b> of the transmitted information signal adjusts, changes or amends intensity of the light emitted. Light source <b>110</b>A, in a number of embodiments, in response to the duty cycle of period <b>205</b> of the transmitted information signal maintains or remains unchanged intensity of the light emitted. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is related to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source <b>110</b> receiving the signal or the information. In a plurality of embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is proportional to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source <b>110</b> receiving the signal or the information. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is inversely proportional to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source <b>110</b> receiving the signal or the information.
0124In some embodiments, a duty cycle may be comprised within a time interval of a signal transmitted between two or more lighting system components. The duty cycle within a time interval may be ratio or a fraction of a duration of time within which signal has a certain value to the entire duration of the time interval <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the duty cycle is a duration of time within a time interval <b>205</b> for which the signal has high values, such as a digital value 1 in digital signals for example, over the entire duration of the time interval <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, duty cycle is a fraction of time within a time interval <b>205</b> for which the signal has a high value over the entire duration of the time interval <b>205</b>. The duty cycle within a time interval, in some embodiments, may be ratio or a fraction of a time within a time interval <b>205</b> for which signal is low values, such as a digital value 0 in digital signals for example, over the entire duration of the time interval <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, duty cycle is a fraction of time within a time interval <b>205</b> for which the signal has a low value over the entire duration of the time interval <b>205</b>. Sometimes, the duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions. Sometimes, each of the portions of the plurality of portions of the duty cycle of the signal may further comprise a duration of the duty cycle. In some embodiments, a duty cycle of a time interval may be a ratio of total amount of time for which the signal within the time interval <b>205</b> was high to the total time interval <b>205</b> duration. For example, a duty cycle may comprise a duration of time within which a plurality of separated data bits <b>215</b> having high values are dispersed within a time interval <b>205</b> and separated from each other by portions of time interval <b>205</b> which does not comprise high values. Therefore, a duty cycle may be the duty cycle of the entire time interval <b>205</b>, regardless of the number of portions of time within the time interval <b>205</b> for which signal was high or low and regardless of whether the signal having certain values is separated by portions of the signal having certain other values.
0125In some embodiments, a length of a period <b>205</b> is adjusted to modulate intensity of a light source <b>110</b> receiving the information. In a number of embodiments, a length of a preceding or a succeeding period <b>205</b> is adjusted to modulate intensity of a light source <b>110</b> receiving the information. Sometimes, an instruction in a preceding period <b>205</b> causes a duty cycle of the preceding period <b>205</b> to temporarily increase the light intensity. In such embodiments, a period <b>205</b> succeeding the preceding period <b>205</b> is adjusted to compensate for the duty cycle in the preceding period <b>205</b> and maintain intensity or brightness of light to be emitted unchanged. In many embodiments, an instruction in a preceding period <b>205</b> causes the duty cycle of the preceding period <b>205</b> to temporarily decrease the light intensity. In such embodiments, a period <b>205</b> succeeding the preceding period <b>205</b> is adjusted to compensate for the duty cycle in the preceding period <b>205</b> and adjust the duty cycle in the succeeding period <b>205</b> to maintain intensity or brightness of light to be emitted unchanged or as intended. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> component transmitting or sending information or communication to another lighting system <b>100</b> component maintains a queue of data to be sent. In a number of embodiments, period <b>205</b> or amount of data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> is adjusted or changed to compensate for the information queued.
0126In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components, such as light source <b>110</b>, receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding information transmitted via data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components not receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding information transmitted via data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding duty cycle of a period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more light sources <b>110</b> which in response to understanding duty cycle of period <b>205</b> adjust intensity of the one or more light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises one or more light sources <b>110</b> which in response to understanding duty cycle of period <b>205</b> maintain intensity of the one or more light sources <b>110</b>.
0127<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref>, in some respect, illustrate embodiments of a lighting system <b>100</b> wherein duty cycle within any of a plurality of concatenated periods <b>205</b> remains equal with or without instruction bits <b>220</b>. In such embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B controls intensity of light source <b>110</b>A by transmitting within any period <b>205</b> a duty cycle having a specific time duration. Time duration of a duty cycle may be defined or specified by a number of bits, number of bits having a value 1 or a value 0. In some embodiments, time duration of a duty cycle is defined or specified by a number of bits transmitted within a period <b>205</b>. In many embodiments, time duration of a duty cycle is defined or specified by a number of bits having a value of 1 transmitted within a period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, communication or information transmitted using a duty cycle may be referred to as pulse width modulation.
0128Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref>, a flow chart of a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal is illustrated. In some embodiments, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> also relates to a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal while a device maintains operation which is responsive to the duty cycle. In brief overview of method <b>300</b>, at step <b>305</b> a first device receives a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval. The duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions and each of which may further comprise a duration of the duty cycle. At step <b>310</b> the first device operates responsive to the duty cycle. At step <b>315</b> the first device detects an instruction identified by at least one portion of the duty cycle. At step <b>320</b> the first device performs a function based on the instruction while the first device maintains operating responsive to the duty cycle. At step <b>325</b> the first device receives a second signal comprising a second duty cycle within a second time interval. The second duty cycle of the second signal may comprise a plurality of portions and each of the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle of the second signal may further comprise a duration of the second duty cycle. At step <b>330</b> the first device operates responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal. At step <b>335</b> the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a second instruction. At step <b>340</b> the first device performs, responsive to the detection, a function based on the second instruction while maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle of the second signal.
0129At step <b>305</b> of the method <b>300</b> a first device receives a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval. In some embodiments, the first device receives a signal from a second device <b>110</b>. In many embodiments, the first device receives a plurality of signals from a plurality of devices <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, the first device receives a signal from a controller, a switch or a source external to the lighting system <b>100</b>. In various embodiments, the first device receives a signal via a wireless link. In a number of embodiments, the first device receives a signal comprising a plurality of duty cycles within a time interval. In various embodiments, the first device receives a signal comprising a plurality of duty cycles within a time interval, the plurality of duty cycles comprising portions of the signal having high values whose sum defines the total duty cycle of the time interval.
0130At step <b>310</b> the first device operates responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device operates in any manner and at any time, in response to the duty cycle. The first device, also referred to as a device <b>110</b>, may perform any operation which is responsive to, or modified by the duty cycle of the signal. In some embodiments, the first device spins a motor and a rotational speed or an acceleration of the motor spin is controlled by the duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments, the first device operates an engine which performs or runs in response to the duty cycle of the signal. In many embodiments, the first device operates an emission of light having an intensity, wherein the intensity is responsive to, modified by, or related to the duty cycle. Sometimes, the first device emits a light having a specific feature, such as a pulse of light, periodicity of pulse, wavelength of light, phase of light, spectral range of light emitted or even power of light, and any of which may be modulated or be responsive to the duty cycle of the signal. The first device may receive a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval <b>205</b> of the signal and perform a function or an operation modulated, controlled or instructed by the duty cycle within the time interval <b>205</b> of the signal. In some embodiments, the first device operates a second device in response to the duty cycle. In many embodiments, the first device operates a plurality of devices in response to the duty cycle. The plurality of devices may perform as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal received by the first device. In some embodiments, the first device operates based on a threshold or a plurality of thresholds of the duty cycle. The duty cycle may be within or past a threshold point which defines an action or an operation which the first device has to perform. For example, the first device may receive a signal having a duty cycle within a threshold range for which the first device does not perform any function, such as the device is shut off or on standby. In a number of embodiments, the first device receives a signal having a duty cycle within a threshold range for which the first device emits a light at a specific intensity or brightness. In many embodiments, the duty cycle of a signal received is within a threshold range which defines a spin speed of a motor, an intensity range of a light source, a wavelength range of a light source, a power output, a current output, a voltage output, or any other operation by any other device.
0131At step <b>315</b> the first device detects an instruction identified by at least one portion of the duty cycle. The first device may detect an instruction using any number of components, units or functions capable of detecting, decoding and processing instructions. In some embodiments, the communicator <b>125</b> or the controller <b>120</b> detects an instruction comprising instruction bits <b>220</b>, data bits <b>215</b> or any data <b>210</b>. In a number of embodiments, the first device detects an instruction using a function, structure or an unit of the first device for intercepting and decoding the instruction. The instruction, in such embodiments, may be a codeword, a number of data bits or a pattern of data bits. In some embodiments, the first device detects an instruction using a detector which detects or decodes the signal. The detector may observe, monitor or detect instructions by monitoring a portion of a signal within a predetermined time interval within the time interval <b>205</b>. The detector may observe, monitor or detect instructions by monitoring a data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> of the signal within a predetermined time interval within the time interval <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the first device detects an instruction by receiving, decoding or monitoring any data bits <b>215</b>, <b>220</b> or <b>210</b> which are within a predetermined portion of a time interval <b>205</b> of the signal. In some embodiments, the first device detects an instruction by recognizing, reading or detecting a portion of a signal within a predetermined portion of a time interval <b>205</b>, or period <b>205</b>. In a plurality of embodiments, the first device detects instructions by observing a specific portion or a specific plurality of portions of the time interval <b>205</b> of the signal. In many embodiments, the instruction is detected by the first device which observes a latter portion of the time interval to search for instruction bits. The first device may detect a codeword, a digital pattern or an instruction comprising any number of data bits <b>215</b>, which may be positioned within any portion of specific time interval within the time interval <b>205</b>. In a variety of embodiments, a portion of the duty cycle of the signal comprises a portion of the instruction. In many embodiments, the first device detects that at least a portion of the duty cycle of the signal comprises a portion of the instruction.
0132At step <b>320</b> the first device performs a function based on the instruction while the first device maintains operating responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of the first device responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of a second device responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of a plurality of devices responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs a function based on the instruction without maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device instructs a second device to perform a function and operates, or maintains operating, of the second device in response to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device was emitting light having an intensity, brightness or pulse frequency as instructed by the previous duty cycle and upon receiving the signal and the duty cycle of the signal, the first device maintains the intensity, the brightness or the pulse frequency of the light emitted as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal. In a variety of embodiments, the first device was operating any one, or any combination of: a light source, a motor, an engine, a power supply or a unit supplying electrical power as instructed by the previous duty cycle as instructed by previous duty cycles, and upon receiving the duty cycle of the signal, the first device maintains operating of the light source, the motor, the engine, the power supply or the unit supplying electrical power of the light emitted as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal. The function may be any action executed upon receiving an instruction, such as for example, turning on or off of a first device. In some embodiments, the function is setting an intensity of the light emitted by the first device. In a plurality of embodiments, the function performed is setting a status, such as a master or a slave status to the first device. In a variety of embodiments, the function performed is processing a communication, data or a command comprised by the instruction. In a number of embodiments, the function is any function or any operation performed by the first device or any device <b>110</b>, or any lighting system component described herein. In some embodiments, the first device performs the function based on the instruction and maintains operating of the first device responsive to the duty cycle. Operating may refer to performing operation of any device <b>110</b> or any function or operation of any lighting system <b>100</b> component described herein.
0133At step <b>325</b> the first device receives a second signal comprising a second duty cycle within a second time interval. In some embodiments, the first device receives a second signal which is a signal immediately following the signal. In some embodiments, the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a plurality of portions. Each of the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle of the second signal may further comprise a duration of the second duty cycle. A second signal may comprise any functionality or any characteristics of the first signal. In some embodiments, the second signal is identical or substantially similar to the first signal. In a variety of embodiments, the second signal comprises a second duty cycle which is different than a first duty cycle. In many embodiments, the second duty cycle is the same as the first duty cycle. The plurality of portions of the second duty cycle may comprise any number of data bits <b>215</b> comprising any number of digital portions of the signal having high or low values. The second duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions which are similar or identical to the plurality of portions of the first duty cycle. The plurality of portions may comprise a portion of a time interval <b>205</b> within which a signal has a high value for the cases in which high value is the active value of the signal, or low value for the cases in which the low value is the active value of the signal. The second time interval may be same as the time interval or any other previous time interval <b>205</b> in the chain of time intervals <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the second time interval is a different time interval than the time interval, or the preceding time interval <b>205</b>. In a number of embodiments, the second time interval is a longer period of time than the time interval. In a plurality of embodiments, the second time interval is a shorter period of time than the time interval.
0134At step <b>330</b> the first device operates responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal. The first device operating responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal may be similar to the first device operating responsive to the duty cycle of the signal. In a number of embodiments, the first device operates or performs an operation of the first device or any other device <b>110</b> in response to the duty cycle of the signal received. In many embodiments, the second duty cycle of the second signal is different than the duty cycle of the signal. The first device may change or modify the operating of, or operation performed by, the first device, the second device or any device which operates in response to the second duty cycle of the second signal. In a number of embodiments, the first device instructs a second device or a plurality of devices to perform in response to the second duty cycle of the second signal. The operating may comprise emitting a light having a specific brightness, intensity, spectral range or pulse duration. In a variety of embodiments, the operating comprises supplying electricity or power to a component or a plurality of components of the first device or any number of devices <b>110</b>, the electricity or power responsive to the duty cycle or the second duty cycle.
0135At step <b>335</b> the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a second instruction. The first device may detect the second instruction in a same way as detecting the instruction. In many embodiments, the second instruction is detected differently than the first instruction. In a number of embodiments, the second instruction comprises a number of data bits <b>215</b> positioned within a specific time interval within time interval <b>205</b>. In a variety of embodiments, a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a portion of the second instruction. In many embodiments, the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a portion of the second instruction.
0136At step <b>340</b> the first device performs, responsive to the detection, a function based on the second instruction while maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle of the second signal. In some embodiments, the first device performs a function based on the second instruction without maintaining operating responsive to the second duty cycle. The function may be any action executed upon receiving an instruction. In a number of embodiments, the function is any function or any operation performed by the first device or any other device <b>110</b> described herein. In some embodiments, the first device performs the function based on the second instruction and maintains operating of the first device responsive to the second duty cycle. In a variety of embodiments, the first device performs the function based on the second instruction and maintains operating of a second device responsive to the second duty cycle. Sometimes, the first device performs the function by any device <b>110</b> based on the second instruction for any device <b>110</b> and maintains operating of any device <b>110</b> in response to the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device instructs a second device to perform a function and operates or maintains operating of the second device in response to the second duty cycle. Operating may refer to performing operation of any device <b>110</b> described herein.
C. Status Assignment of Lighting System Components
0137Further referring to figures <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref> discussed in the earlier sections, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 2A and 2B</figref> further refer to embodiments within which light sources <b>110</b> may transmit among each other instructions to assign statuses of masters and slaves. In one example, a first lighting system <b>100</b> component, such as a lighting device <b>110</b> may have a status of a master. The master first lighting device <b>110</b> may transmit a first information using data bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> to a second lighting system <b>100</b> component, such as a second lighting device <b>110</b>. The second lighting device component having a slave status. The second lighting system <b>100</b> component receives the first information and in response to the first information adjusts the status of the second lighting system <b>100</b> component to a master status. The second lighting system <b>100</b> component having a master status transmits a second information using data bits <b>215</b> or <b>220</b> to the first lighting system <b>100</b> component. The first lighting system <b>100</b> component receives the second information and in response to the second information adjusts the status of the first lighting system <b>100</b> component to a status of a slave.
0138In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B, having a master status, transmits a first information using data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> to light source <b>110</b>A which has a slave status. Light source <b>110</b>A receives the first information and in response to the first information adjusts the status of the light source <b>110</b>A to a master status. Light source <b>110</b>A, having a master status, transmits a second information using data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> to the light source <b>110</b>B. Light source <b>110</b>B receives the second information and in response to the second information adjusts the status of the first light source <b>110</b>B to a slave status. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A, having a master status, transmits a third information via data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> to a plurality of lighting system components, one of which is light source <b>110</b>B. The third information transmitted by light source <b>110</b>A comprises address <b>127</b>B. The plurality of lighting system components receive the third information and light source <b>110</b>B receives the third information. Light source <b>110</b>B matches address <b>127</b>B within the third information to address <b>127</b>B of the light source <b>110</b>B. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B, in response to the third information, adjusts the status of light source <b>110</b>B to a status of a master. In a number of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B, in response to the address <b>127</b>B matching the address <b>127</b>B of the light source <b>110</b>B, adjusts the status of light source <b>110</b>B to a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B, in response to the received third information and in response to the address <b>127</b>B matching the address <b>127</b>B of the light source <b>110</b>B, adjusts the status of light source <b>110</b>B to a status of a master.
0139In some embodiments, a plurality of light sources <b>110</b>, each having a status of a master or a slave, communicate using a same connection <b>105</b> component, such as a wire or an electrical current conducting line. In such embodiments, any of the light sources <b>110</b> may become a master or a slave. Sometimes, the plurality of light sources <b>110</b> communicating over a same connection <b>105</b> component include only a single master, while all other light sources <b>110</b> have a status of a slave. In such embodiments, one of the light sources <b>110</b> having a status of a slave pulls the voltage potential within the connection <b>105</b> component low for a period of time, such as a microsecond, a millisecond or a second. The light source <b>110</b> having a status of a master interprets the low voltage signal in the connection <b>105</b> component as a signal to change status from master to slave. The light source <b>110</b> having a status of a master accepts the status of a slave, and the light source <b>110</b> which pulled the voltage potential low accepts the status of a master. Thus the signal across the connection <b>105</b> component signals a change in the status of one or more light sources <b>110</b> communicating over the same connection <b>105</b> component. In some embodiments, the signal that changes the status of one or more lighting system components may be a high voltage potential signal, a low voltage signal, an impulse, a digital pattern, a ground signal, or any other analog or digital signal transmitted over connection <b>105</b>.
0140In a number of embodiments, when a group of light sources <b>110</b> are all off, upon being turned on, each one of the group of light sources <b>110</b> turns on with a status of a master. In some embodiments, upon receiving a signal that a light source <b>110</b> having a master status, also called a master, already exists, a light source that has just turned on changes its own status to a status of a slave. Thus, when a group of light sources <b>110</b> are all turned on at once it is ensured that at least one master exists. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b> upon turning on and automatically changing its own status to a master, the light source <b>110</b> listens for a period of time if there is another master on the network. If the light source <b>110</b> does not receive any messages that there is another master on the network, the light source <b>110</b> remains the master.
0141In some embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving instruction from a sender assembles received bits <b>215</b> from a plurality of periods <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving information from a sender parses the bits and bytes of the received information and forms instruction, data or commands. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> component receiving instruction from a sender interprets the forms instructions, data or commands and implements the same formed instructions, data or commands.
0142Therefore, in many embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components use bidirectional digital pulse width modulated communication to transmit and receive information. Furthermore, in some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components use digital pulse width modulated communication to control performance and functionality of one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. Light brightness, also referred to as intensity, in many embodiments is controlled, communicated or instructed using a pulse width modulated communication. In many embodiments, light brightness or intensity is controlled, communicated or instructed using a duty cycle of a period <b>205</b>. Pulse width modulated signals may therefore be referred to as transport mechanism of the digital communication between lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0000D. Lighting System Intensity Control with Digital Patterning and Color Mixing
0143Referring back to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2A</figref> and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2B</figref>, embodiments of systems and methods for controlling intensity or brightness of light devices <b>110</b> using digital patterns are depicted. A digital pattern may be any order or any formation of data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. A digital pattern may include an order or a formation of a specific number of data bits within a period <b>205</b>. Data bits, such as data bits <b>215</b>, may include bits having a high value, or a digital value of 1, and a number of data bits having a low value, or a digital value of 0. Data bits may form a duty cycle within the period <b>205</b>. The duty cycle formed by the data bits of the digital pattern may identify the intensity or brightness of the light emitted. Duty cycle may be determined by summing up all time durations of the digital patterns for which data bits had high values within the time interval. For example, if the signal comprising a data stream made up of digital patterns has data bits having high values 70 percent of the time within a time interval, the duty cycle for the time interval may be 0.7. The duty cycle may be determined by summing portions of the signal within the time interval for which the signal was high and dividing the signal by the total duration of the time interval. In some embodiments, duty cycle is determined based on a sum of time durations of the signal having low values.
0144Data bits <b>215</b> may be transmitted via a connection <b>105</b> within one or more time intervals <b>205</b>. A number of data bits having a value of 1 (and/or a value of zero) within the time interval may determine the intensity of light or brightness of light emitted by the light device <b>110</b>. The intensity may be determined for the duration of that time interval. A digital pattern may include an order or a formation of data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> within a predetermined number of concatenated periods <b>205</b>. For example, a stream of data bits <b>215</b> may be transmitted to a light device <b>110</b> within a chain of a predetermined number of periods <b>205</b>, such as for example 128 periods <b>205</b>. Each period <b>205</b> may include a separate digital pattern. A lighting device <b>110</b> receiving the data stream may calculate a duty cycle for all of 128 periods <b>205</b> using all the digital data patterns within each period. The duty cycle of the 128 periods may indicate the brightness or intensity at which light device <b>110</b> will emit. In one instance, duty cycle of 128 periods may be 0.8, indicating that the light device <b>110</b> will emit at 80% of it's maximum brightness.
0145A digital pattern may comprise a ratio of high to low values which encode or identify an intensity or brightness of light. The intensity or brightness of light emitted may defined by a total number of bits having a value of 1 within a period of time per a period of time. Digital patterns may include one or more predetermined patterns of data bits <b>215</b> that are oriented to have any high value signal to low value signal ratio. In some embodiments, the ratio of high signal to a total duration of period may encode or identify the brightness or intensity. For example, if a period <b>205</b> has six bits of data having a value of 1 and two bits of data having a value of zero, the intensity or brightness may indicate 6/8 of maximum intensity or brightness for that period <b>205</b>.
0146In some embodiments, a digital pattern may identify a specific ratio of bits having high values to bits having low values within a period <b>205</b>. A specific ratio may include a duration of time for which a portion of a period <b>205</b> includes high values, such as digital bits with a value of 1 divided by the entire time duration of period <b>205</b>. Similarly, the specific ratio may include a duration of time for which a portion of the period <b>205</b> includes low values having a digital value of zero divided by the entire time duration of period <b>205</b>. The specific ratio may identify a duty cycle. The duty cycle may be proportional or inversely proportional to the brightness or intensity of the light emitted. Similarly, the specific ratio of the signal may include a ratio of a duration of time for which signal is high in relation to the duration of time for which the signal is low. An algorithm may be used to identify the intensity or brightness based on the ratio of the duration of time for which the signal is high in relation to the time duration for which the signal is low. A digital pattern may identify or form an average value of the signal within one or more periods <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, a digital pattern forms an average value of the bits within a period <b>205</b>. The average value of the bits within a period <b>205</b> may determine or identify the intensity or brightness of the light emitted. Any of the duty cycle, average signal, and the specific ratios may be formed by digital signals, as well as analog signals, pulses, PWM signals, encoded data bit signals, encoded digital number signals, or any other type and form of signals having at least a high value and a low value.
0147A digital pattern may be random or predetermined and may include any number of digital bits of any pattern of format. Digital bits may be formed by a switch or a transistor. The switch or the transistor may transmit high and low signals. The high and low signals may be received by the light devices <b>110</b>, and may be processed by filters to determine the specific ratios, average values or the duty cycles. In one example, a digital pattern may include a predetermined total number of data bits of which 10 data bits have a high value within a period <b>205</b>. The brightness or intensity of the light emitted by the light device may be determined by dividing 10 bits with the total predetermined number of data bits within the period that can be transmitted within the period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, digital pattern may include a predetermined order of bits. In other embodiments, digital pattern includes a random order of the bits.
0148Digital pattern may be altered to accommodate instructions or information transmitted to the light device <b>110</b> using instruction bits <b>220</b>. For example, if a transmission includes a number of bits having a high value within a period <b>205</b>, the digital pattern may add a number of bits that accommodates the already transmitted instruction bits <b>220</b> within the period <b>205</b>. If transmission bits <b>220</b> carry an instruction to the light device <b>220</b>, the digital pattern within the same period <b>205</b> may include a number of bits determined by subtracting the number of instruction bits having a high value from the originally intended digital pattern bits. Then, a digital pattern that has a number of data bits that is determined by subtracting the number of already sent instruction bits having a high value from the total intended number of data bits having a high value. As such, the number of bits having a high value from the instruction within the period <b>205</b> would be included in the overall digital pattern, thereby maintaining the duty cycle unchanged even if an instruction is transmitted within same period <b>205</b>. Using this technique, a digital pattern may maintain the intensity or brightness of the light device <b>110</b>, while an instruction could be transmitted within the period <b>205</b> without affecting the total number of data bits having a high value. In a similar embodiment, in techniques where data bits determining intensity have a low value, a number of bits having the low value would be maintained within the period to accommodate the transmitted instruction.
0149In some embodiments, a digital pattern comprises a number of data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> which is equal over all periods <b>205</b>. As the data bits are transmitted through a plurality of periods <b>205</b>, the lighting device <b>110</b> may continuously receive intensity information and instructions via digital patterns of the periods <b>205</b>. The digital patterns may instruct the lighting device <b>110</b> to emit light at the intensity or brightness indicated by the digital pattern of each period. As periods may include predetermined durations of time a continuous data stream of digital patterns may be received to maintain desired intensity. Each digital pattern may include a predetermined number of data bits or a varying or random number of data bits within each time period. In some embodiments, periods <b>205</b> may have a varying number of data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. As periods <b>205</b> may be indicated by a specific signal, such as one or more bits, pause or an impulse, periods <b>205</b> may vary in time duration as well as the number of bits transmitted. In some embodiments, digital pattern affects or defines duty cycle of a period <b>205</b>.
0150A digital pattern of a period <b>205</b> may include any number of data bits, such as between 1 and 1024 data bits. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes more than 1024 data bits within a period <b>205</b>. In further embodiments, a digital pattern includes between 4 and 512 data bits, such as 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 256 and 512 data bits. In one example, eight data bits <b>215</b> may be transmitted within a period <b>205</b>. An 8-bit digital patterning for generating the digital pattern may include any number of sequences or distinct digital patterns of any variation of 8 bits. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes a single bit having a high value, or a value of 1, and seven remaining bits within the period <b>205</b> having a low value or a value of zero. In these embodiments, duty cycle of the period <b>205</b> may be ⅛. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes two out of eight bits having a high value or a bit having a value of 1, and six remaining bits having a value of zero or a low value. In these embodiments, duty cycle may be ¼. In still further embodiments, a digital pattern may include 4 bits of high value and 4 bits of low value. In these embodiments, duty cycle may be ½. These bits may be ordered in a predetermined fashion to maintain a desired duty cycle. In some embodiments, digital patterns are randomized while maintaining the desired duty cycle. For example, a duty cycle of ¼ may be generated by an 8-bit digital pattern of 01010101, 00001111, 11001100, 01100110 or any other digital pattern having 4 high bits and 4 low bits within a period <b>205</b>. Similarly, any digital patterns may be generated, including five, six, seven or eight bits having high values. As period <b>205</b> may include any number of bits, such as a total of 16 bits, a digital pattern may have any number of variations to accommodate any number of bits. In the example of a digital pattern for a 16 bit period <b>205</b>, a duty cycle of 15/16 may be implemented by a pattern of 0111111111111111, 1110111111111111, 1111111101111111, 1111111111111101, or any other configuration of the similar kind. Such concepts may apply to embodiments of digital patterns of any number of bits <b>215</b> within a period <b>205</b>, such as a 4 bit digital pattern, 6 bit digital pattern, 8 bit digital pattern, 10 bit digital pattern, 12 bit digital pattern, 16 bit digital pattern, 24 bit digital pattern, 32 bit digital pattern, 64 bit digital pattern or a digital pattern comprising any number of data bits within one or more periods <b>205</b>.
0151A digital pattern may also include a numbering format or a code. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes a data bits identifying a number. For example, a digital pattern may include code 0001 identifying the number 1, 0010 identifying a number 2, 0100 identifying a number 4 or a 1000 identifying a number 8. In further embodiments, a digital pattern may include code 0101 identifying a number 5 or a 1010 identifying a number 10. The light source <b>110</b> may receive the codes and interpret the numbers accordingly. The light source may determine a value of 10 to mean an intensity of 10/16 of the maximum intensity of the light for the lighting device. In some embodiments, the light source may determine the value of 10 to mean a level 10 of a total of 16 levels of intensity for the light emitted. Similarly, a digital pattern may include any type and form of code that may be mapped, encoded, decoded or interpreted by the light source <b>110</b> to identify a brightness or intensity of the light emitted.
0152Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 4A-B</figref> embodiments of a digital pattern having a smaller number of bits within a period <b>305</b> is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 4A-B</figref> illustrate digital data transmitted between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B divided into periods <b>305</b>, each of which includes 8 bits of data. Period <b>305</b> include a period of time within which 8 bits of data <b>215</b> are transmitted, sent or received by lighting device <b>110</b>. Similarly, period <b>305</b> may be modified so that any number of data bits are transmitted within the period <b>305</b>, such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 24, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 or any other number of data bits. In some embodiments, period <b>305</b> is a period <b>205</b>. In further embodiments, period <b>305</b> is a duration of time within which 8 bits are transmitted. In still further embodiments, a period <b>205</b> includes a plurality of periods <b>305</b>. A period <b>305</b> may include a number of bits of data one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components use or receive in a single instruction or a single instruction set. Periods <b>205</b> or <b>305</b> may have any duration of time between 1 microsecond and 100 seconds. Periods <b>205</b> or <b>305</b> may include one or more durations of time, such as 0.1 microsecond, 1 microsecond, 10 microseconds, 50 microseconds, 100 microseconds, 1 millisecond, 10 milliseconds, 50 milliseconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 10 seconds or a 100 seconds. In some embodiments, 8-bit period <b>305</b> is a period of time defined by, determined by, or corresponding to a duration of time within which lighting system <b>100</b> components communicated via connection <b>105</b> transmit 8 bits of data <b>210</b>. In some embodiments, period <b>305</b> is a period of time defined by, determined by, or corresponding to a duration of time within which lighting system <b>100</b> components communicated via connection <b>105</b> receive any predetermined number of data bits, such as 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 256, or 512. Periods <b>305</b> may include same or different durations of time. In some embodiments, some periods <b>305</b> are longer or shorter than other periods <b>305</b>. In further embodiments, all periods <b>305</b> are of a same predetermined length of time. Each period <b>305</b> may include a same predetermined number of data bits. In some embodiments, some periods <b>305</b> include a number of data bits that is different than the number of data bits of another period <b>305</b>. A period <b>205</b> may include a predetermined number of periods <b>305</b>. For example, a period <b>205</b> may include a duration of time within which a predetermined number of periods <b>205</b> is enclosed. Each period <b>205</b> may include a digital pattern having any number of bits. In some embodiments, some periods <b>305</b> of a period <b>205</b> may have different average value of the data bits within the period <b>205</b> from the average values of data bits of other periods <b>305</b> of the same period <b>205</b>. Similarly, some periods <b>305</b> of a period <b>205</b> may include a different number of data bits having a high value from a number of data bits having a high value within other periods <b>305</b> of the same periods <b>205</b>. As such, a total duration of time for which the signal has a high value within a period <b>305</b> may vary from other periods <b>305</b> of the same period <b>205</b>. A ratio of a duration of time within which the signal has a high value per a total duration of a period <b>305</b> may be also referred to as the duty cycle of the period <b>305</b>. Duty cycles of some periods <b>305</b> of a period <b>205</b> may differ from the duty cycles of other periods <b>305</b> of the same period <b>205</b>.
0153In one example, a period <b>205</b> may include 128 periods <b>205</b> each of which further includes an 8 bit digital pattern. The period <b>205</b> along with all the bits from each of the periods <b>305</b> within the period <b>205</b> may form or identify a specific ratio of a number of bits having a high value to a number of bits having a low value within the period <b>205</b>. The period <b>205</b> may have a duty cycle determined by a total duration of time within the period <b>205</b> for which the signal is high (or for which the bits have a value of 1) divided by the total duration of time of the period <b>205</b>. The duty cycle of the period <b>205</b> may be used to scale the maximum intensity or brightness of the light emitted by the light source <b>110</b> to the desired intensity. A new period <b>205</b> immediately following the period <b>205</b> may identify another duty cycle for a changed or modified intensity or brightness. The light source may modify the light intensity emitted based on the new duty cycle for the new period <b>205</b>. Should the light source <b>110</b> receive an instruction or a command within one or more periods <b>305</b> of a period <b>205</b>, digital patterns of other periods <b>305</b> within the period <b>205</b> may be modified by the pattern generator of the communicator <b>125</b> of the sender to maintain the desired intensity for the light source <b>110</b> at a predetermined level. Using the real time update via a stream of bits divided into periods <b>305</b> within a period <b>205</b>, light devices <b>110</b> may receive real-time updated intensity or brightness while receiving instructions or commands for other functions or purposes of the light device <b>110</b>.
0154Still referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 4A-B</figref>, an embodiment of a digital pattern determining intensity or brightness via a period <b>315</b> for a 16-bit transmission is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 4A-B</figref> illustrate a light source <b>110</b>A connected to light source <b>110</b>B via connection <b>105</b>. Connection <b>105</b> transmits information or communication transmitted between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4B</figref> illustrates embodiments where digital data transmitted between light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B divided into 8-bit periods <b>305</b> and 16-bit periods <b>315</b>. In some embodiments, 8-bit period <b>305</b> may be modified to accommodate a 16-bit period <b>315</b> for a finer control of the brightness and intensity range. As such, instead of dividing the total brightness in 8 shades of brightness, the brightness intensity may be divided into 16 shades, or any other number of shades. In this example, a 16-bit period <b>315</b> is a period <b>205</b> whose time length is tailored to allow transmission of 16 bits of data <b>215</b> within the period <b>205</b>.
0155The plurality of periods <b>305</b> or periods <b>315</b> within a period <b>205</b> may include any digital pattern. In one example, a period <b>305</b> of a period <b>205</b> may have 4 bits having a high value and 4 bits having a low value, while another period <b>305</b> from the same period <b>205</b> may include 8 bits having a high value and no bits having a low value. Duty cycles of periods <b>305</b>, average values of signal within the period <b>305</b> or specific ratios of the high to low bits within periods <b>305</b> may vary while the overall duty cycle, average value or specific ratio of the period <b>205</b> as a whole may be maintained at a particular predetermined level. In further example, a period <b>205</b> comprising 50 periods <b>305</b> may include one or more periods comprising instructions and commands for the light device <b>110</b>. The periods <b>305</b> within which the instructions were transmitted may have duty cycles altered from other duty cycles. (Duty cycles of periods <b>305</b> may be defined as durations of time for which the signal had a high value divided by the total duration of time of period <b>305</b>) A pattern generator of the communicator <b>125</b> sending the data bits to the light device <b>110</b> may compensate for the transmitted instructions by increasing or decreasing the number of data bits having a high value in order to maintain the intensity or brightness of the entire period <b>205</b> at a predetermined level. The pattern generator may keep a track of the number of data bits having a high value within a period <b>205</b>. As instructions and commands are transmitted to the light device <b>110</b>, pattern generator of the communicator <b>125</b> of the sender may determine how many data bits having a high value need to be added in the periods <b>305</b> following the periods <b>305</b> that included the instructions. By keeping track of the overall number of data bits <b>215</b> within a period <b>205</b>, intensity and brightness may remained controlled by the number of data bits having a high value even when the instructions are transmitted within the period <b>205</b>.
0156In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components, such as light source <b>110</b>B and light source <b>110</b>A, communicate using data bits <b>215</b>, instruction bits <b>220</b> or a combination of data bits <b>215</b> and instruction bits <b>220</b>. The light devices <b>110</b> may receive real time adjustments for the brightness or intensity for each light source <b>110</b> via the stream of data bits per each receiving period <b>205</b>. Sometimes, lighting system components using 8-bit periods <b>305</b> are capable of transmitting or receiving information twice as fast. In such embodiments, lighting system components, such as light sources <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B 16 bit send or transmit a 16-bit digital pattern within an 8 bit period. In further embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B communicates with light source <b>110</b>A transmitting or receiving information within 8-bit periods <b>305</b>. In many embodiments, light source <b>110</b>B transmits a 16-bit digital pattern comprising data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b> within an 8-bit period <b>305</b> to light source <b>110</b>A. Light source <b>110</b>A receives 16-bit digital pattern within the 8-bit period <b>305</b> and in response to the received 16-bit digital pattern adjusts, changes or maintains the intensity of the light emitted by the light source <b>110</b>A.
0157Duration of periods <b>205</b>, <b>305</b> or <b>315</b> may be adjusted to affect intensity. In some embodiments, periods <b>205</b>, <b>305</b> or <b>315</b> are increased or decreased to modulate average intensity of a light source <b>110</b> receiving the information. In some embodiments, preceding periods <b>305</b> or <b>315</b> are increased or decreased and succeeding periods <b>305</b> or <b>315</b> are adjusted accordingly to maintain a desired intensity over a <b>205</b> period.
0158Digital patterns comprising any number of bits may have duty cycles of periods <b>205</b>, <b>305</b> or <b>315</b>, defined by a number of bits having values of 1 or 0. In many embodiments, two different digital patterns comprising a same total number of bits within a period, such as period <b>205</b>, <b>305</b> or <b>315</b>, may have a same or a different duty cycle. The duty cycle of a period may be determined by a ratio of the number of bits having a high value to the number of bits having a low value of that same period. Duty cycle of a period may also be determined by summing up all durations of time for which the signal (data bits) had a high value and divide this sum of the durations of time with a total duration of time of the period. Duty cycle may also be determined by taking an average value of all portions of the signal (bits having a high value and bits having a low value). Duty cycle may be used to identify or determine the brightness or the intensity of the light emitted. The light device <b>110</b> may include a filter within a controller <b>120</b> or a communicator <b>125</b> that determines the duty cycle and controls the brightness or intensity of the light emitted. The filter may determine the duty cycle of each period <b>205</b> by counting the instructions from within the period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the filter of the controller <b>120</b> or the communicator <b>125</b> of the receiving light source <b>110</b> may determine the duty cycle of the period <b>205</b> while not including the instructions within the period <b>205</b>.
0159Digital patterns within periods <b>305</b>, <b>315</b> and <b>205</b> may be used to control light intensity or color mixing of light sources <b>110</b> emitting different color light or having different spectral ranges. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> comprises a plurality of light sources <b>110</b> each emitting a light of a different spectral range or a different color. The plurality of light sources may be within a single lighting fixture, or they may comprise separate lighting devices. The lighting system <b>100</b> may include a light source <b>110</b>A emitting a red light, a light source <b>110</b>B emitting a green light and a light source <b>110</b>C emitting a blue light. In such a configuration, the lighting system <b>100</b> may use digital patterns within periods <b>305</b>, <b>315</b> and <b>205</b> to govern or control the overall color of light emitted by all of the light sources <b>110</b>A-C. For example, digital patterns may govern the intensity of each of the light devices <b>110</b>A-C in order to establish a specific hue of light, such as a white color for example. The lighting system may transmit digital patterns and vary the number of data bits within each period of time to produce any particular color by mixing light at intensities determined via digital patterning from each one of the sources <b>110</b>A-C. The light sources <b>110</b>A-C may receive digital patterns within varying durations of time, or varying periods <b>205</b> for each of the light source <b>110</b>A-C in order to produce the white light. The light sources <b>110</b>A-C may receive real-time updates of the intensity at periods of <b>205</b> and receive instructions within periods <b>305</b> which are within periods <b>205</b>. Sometimes, a lighting system <b>100</b> controls the total color output of the light emitted by all three light sources <b>110</b> by using a feedback to adjust intensity of some light sources via digital patterning in order to adjust the total hue of the output light. In one example, a plurality of light sources <b>110</b>A-N may each emit light of a different spectral range or a different color. In such embodiments, a lighting system <b>100</b> component controlling the light sources <b>110</b>A-N may emit separate data streams comprising digital patterns within periods <b>305</b> and <b>205</b> to each of the light sources <b>110</b> in order to control the color rendering or the total color output produced by the light sources <b>110</b>A-N.
0160Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4C</figref>, an embodiment of steps of a method <b>400</b> for modulating intensity of light emitted by a lighting device using a digital pattern is depicted. In some embodiments, method <b>400</b> relates to a method of color mixing of a plurality of light sources emitting different light color. At step <b>405</b> of the method <b>400</b>, a controller receives or generates an instruction for a remote lighting device and a setting for an intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. At step <b>410</b>, the controller generates a signal that comprises the instruction, a time period and a duty cycle of the signal within a time interval of the time period. The duty cycle of the signal may be based on a sum of portions of a digital pattern of the signal which have a high value within the time interval. At step <b>415</b>, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wire used for supplying electrical power to the remote lighting device. At step <b>420</b>, the remote lighting device establishes intensity of light or performs color mixing of a plurality of lights emitting different colors of light, based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time interval. At step <b>425</b>, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined intensity of the light or mixes colors of light based on intensities of each of the plurality of light sources emitting a different color of light. At step <b>430</b>, the remote lighting device takes or implements an action based on the instruction from the signal.
0161Further referring to step <b>405</b>, a controller acquires an instruction and a setting for a remote lighting device. The remote lighting device may include a single light source or a plurality of light sources. The instruction may include an instruction for a single light source or for each of the plurality of light sources. In some embodiments, the controller generates the instruction or the setting. In further embodiments, the controller receives the instruction or the setting from another lighting system component. In still further embodiments, the controller generates an instruction or a setting based on a configuration set by a user. In further embodiments, the controller receives an instruction or a setting from a user input or an instruction file. In some embodiments, a controller generates instructions based on a program, script, prior instruction file or a user input identifying actions to be taken by the remote lighting device.
0162The acquired instruction may include any type and form of a command for an action implemented by a lighting device. In some embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an error message. In other embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement message or an alert when an address of an instruction matches the address of the lighting device. In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement if ambient light detector of the lighting device is active. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement if a presence of an object is detected in the vicinity of a light switch enclosure.
0163In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to set a brightness value of the remote lighting device or a light source within the remote lighting device, such as a green light source, blue light source or a red light source of the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to use an external source for PWM signal to control the intensity of the light. In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to use a value sent to the remote lighting device as a maximum intensity or maximum brightness value of the remote lighting device. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to turn the light emitted by the remote lighting device off by dimming.
0164In some embodiments, the instruction includes a setting for the remote lighting device as a master or a slave. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a setting for the remote lighting device as a member of a group or a zone. The setting for the remote lighting device may include a setting for an intensity or brightness of the light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the setting identifies an intensity or brightness of light relative to the maximum intensity set for the remote lighting device. The setting may identify the dimness or brightness of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device for a predetermined duration of time.
0165At step <b>410</b>, the controller generates a signal comprising the instruction, a time period and a duty cycle of the signal within a time interval. The controller may generate a signal comprising one or more digital patterns. Digital patterns may be generated to compensate for any instructions to be embedded with the signal. Digital patterns may further be generated to ensure that a duty cycle within a time interval remains at a predetermined level. In some embodiments, digital patterns comprise one or more portions of the signal having high and low values within a time interval. In further embodiments, a digital pattern that includes a plurality of high and low data bits is located within a predetermined time interval of a plurality of time intervals of a time period of a signal. Each time interval may or may not include an instruction. Each time interval may include one or more digital patterns generated to ensure that the duty cycle of the signal remains at a level indicating a predetermined light intensity for the time interval, regardless of the presence of the instruction within the time interval. The duty cycle of the signal may be based upon a sum of portions of one or more digital patterns having a high value within a predetermined time interval. In one embodiment, the controller generates the signal that has a digital pattern that includes digital bits having high values and low values within a time interval of the time period. In some embodiments, digital patterns may include any variation or order of high and low data bits within a time interval. The digital pattern may be generated such that a sum of time durations of the digital bits having high values within a time interval divided by the duration of the time interval corresponds to the setting for the intensity of the light.
0166In one example, a generated digital pattern includes a sum of time durations of the signal having high values 65 percent of the time within the time interval. In such example, the sum of the time durations having high values divided by the total duration of the time interval may equal 0.65. This result may correspond to the setting for the intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device identifying an intensity of about 65% of the maximum light intensity.
0167In other embodiments, digital patterns of the signal may be generated to identify any intensity of light. The intensity may be in percentages of the maximum light intensity, in Watts, Watts per meter square, lumens, nits or any other unit of light intensity or brightness. In some embodiments, a signal generator of the controller generates the signal comprising the digital patterns and a plurality of time intervals within a time period. The signal may be generated to further include the instruction into one or more of the time intervals of the time period of the signal. In some embodiments, the controller generates a signal to be comprised by a first time interval of the time period while generating one or more digital patterns of the first time interval.
0168The digital patterns may be generated to account for the number of the portions of the instruction having high values so that the total duty cycle within the first time interval remains at a predetermined level regardless of the instruction being present. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal to include the instruction in the first time interval of the time period. In such embodiments, digital patterns are included into other time intervals of the time period to compensate or account for the instruction and maintain the duty cycle within the period at a predetermined level.
0169At step <b>415</b>, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wire of the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a power supplying line or an active wire of a standard power distribution system powering the lighting device. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a common wire of a traditional power distribution system. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a ground wire, or a conductive sheathing of a cable. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wireless signal, such as a WIFI signal or a radio signal. In yet further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a network, such as a computing network or a communication network of the plurality of lighting devices. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via an infrared channel. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via an optical channel, such as a fiber optic or an optical wireless receiving system. The remote lighting device may receive the signal via a controller or a communicator. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device uses a signal processor or a signal processing unit to receive and process the signal. In other embodiments, controller filters the signal using filters, such as frequency filters, power filters or optical filters. The filtered signal may be processed for the duty cycle and for the instructions for the remote lighting device.
0170At step <b>420</b>, the remote lighting device establishes intensity of light based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time interval. The remote lighting device may establish the intensity based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time period. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the ratio of the sum of the portions of the digital patterns within the time interval having high values and a duration of the time interval. In other embodiments, the duty cycle is determined based on a ratio of the sum of the portions of the digital patterns within a plurality of time intervals of the time period and the entire duration of the time period. In some embodiments, a signal processor of a controller of the remote lighting device processes the signal to determine the duty cycle. The signal may be processed using any type of function, script or an algorithm operating of the signal processor to determine the duty cycle. In further embodiments, the controller of the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle. In further embodiments, the communicator of the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle within the time period. In still further embodiments, the controller of the remote lighting device screens for any instructions within the received signal and determines the duty cycle of the signal. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of the Watts of the light emitted. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of Watts per unit of area. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle within each single time period. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle over a plurality of time periods. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle over a plurality of time intervals within a single time period. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle within each individual time interval of each individual time period. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of the relative light intensity of the remote lighting device, such as the maximum light intensity. For example, the remote lighting device may determine the intensity of light based on the duty cycle identifying 0.85 or 85% of the maximum light intensity of the remote lighting device.
0171At step <b>425</b>, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined intensity of light. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined ratio. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device multiplies the ratio with the maximum intensity to determine the intensity of light at which the remote lighting device will emit. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device continuously receives the signal and determines the intensity for each time period of the signal. In such embodiments, the remote lighting device updates or adjusts the intensity of the light emitted in real-time. For example, in an instance where a time period comprises time a duration of a millisecond, the intensity of the light emitted may be determined for the millisecond. The intensity of light at which the remote lighting device would operate the following millisecond may be determined based on the duty cycle of the signal within the following time period. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device maintains the intensity of light until a signal comprising a different duty cycle within a time period or time interval is detected.
0172At step <b>430</b>, the remote lighting device takes an action based on the instruction. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an error message out in response to the instruction. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement message or an alert when an address of an instruction matches the address of the lighting device in response to the instruction. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement if ambient light detector of the lighting device is active. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement if a presence of an object is the object is detected in the vicinity of a light switch enclosure. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a brightness value of the remote lighting device or a light source within the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a brightness or intensity value for a green light source, a blue light source or a red light source within the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device begins to use an external source for PWM signal to control the intensity of the light. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device begins to use a value sent to the remote lighting device as a maximum intensity or maximum brightness value of the remote lighting device. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device turns the light emitted by the remote lighting device off by dimming. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a status for the remote lighting device as a master or a slave in response to the instruction. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device sets the remote lighting device as a member of a group or a zone in response to the instruction. The remote lighting device may implement any instruction received or set any configuration or setting in response to the instruction received from the signal. Any portion of the controller of the remote lighting device may receive and process the instruction. In some embodiments, a communicator of the remote lighting device processes the instruction. The remote lighting device may implement any action or a function instructed by any instruction of a command received.
0173In one example, a lighting device, such as a standard fluorescent lighting fixture or a source comprising a plurality of light emitting diodes is installed in an office, a building or at a home. The lighting device may include a single color light source or a plurality of light sources, each of which may emit light of a different color. The lighting device may be used in communication with one or more other lighting devices which may use controllers to send control signals coordinating operations between the light sources. The intensity of light emitted by a lighting device, or a light source, may be controlled via a received signal that includes one or more digital patterns identifying the intensity or brightness. The signal may be delivered to the lighting device via standard wiring components commonly used for providing power to the lighting fixtures. Such standard wiring components may include electrical wires or power lines used for providing electrical power for the light sources. More specifically, the signal may be delivered via traditional wires, such as active lines, common lines or ground lines of the standard power distribution electrical wiring system. The signal may include analog or digital components and may include any type, form or format of signal. The signal may comprise digital patterns that may be made up of pulse width modulated signals, square wave signals, datagram, data packets, or any other type or form of digital information. The signal may further comprise a stream of data bits divided into time intervals, each comprising one or more portions of the signal. The portions of the signal may include digital patterns identifying intensity or brightness of the light to be emitted by the remote lighting device receiving the signal. In some embodiments, digital patterns identify a duty cycle within a time interval. Such duty cycle within the time interval may be based on a sum of all time durations of the signal for which the signal is high within the time interval. The sum of the time durations may be divided by the total duration of the time interval to determine the ratio of the intensity. The ratio may be the ratio of the maximum intensity of light that can be emitted by the remote lighting device. The lighting device may filter and process the digital patterns and identify the intensity of the light from the digital patterns by determining the duty cycle or the ratio based on the duty cycle. The remote lighting device may emit the light as identified by the duty cycle or the ratio based on the duty cycle.
E. Non-Contact Switch and Selection
0174Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5A</figref>, an embodiment of a non-contact selection and control device of a lighting system <b>100</b> is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5A</figref> depicts a lighting system <b>100</b> comprising a non-contact device <b>400</b> or a light non-contact switch <b>400</b> that includes a light source LED <b>405</b>, LED controller <b>410</b>, power supply <b>140</b>, light detector <b>420</b> and detector controller <b>425</b>. The non-contact device <b>400</b> is in connection with one or more LED devices, such as lighting devices or sources <b>110</b> or any other components of the lighting system <b>100</b>. LED <b>405</b> and light detector <b>420</b> further comprise gain circuit <b>470</b>. LED <b>405</b> of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> is a light source that may emit an electromagnetic signal, such as a light, a wireless or an optical signal. LED <b>405</b> is controlled by a LED Controller <b>410</b> via a connection <b>105</b>. The components of the non-contact device <b>400</b> may also be connected to a power supply <b>140</b>. Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may further include a light detector <b>420</b> that may be connected to detector controller <b>425</b> via connection <b>105</b>. The non-contact device <b>400</b> may detect an object <b>450</b> located outside of the light non-contact switch <b>400</b> by detecting any interference, effect or reflection of the signal emitted by LED <b>405</b> caused by the object <b>450</b>. Object <b>405</b> may also generate or emit an electromagnetic or other type or form signal to be detected by the non-contact device <b>400</b>. Light detector <b>420</b> of the non-contact device <b>400</b> may be controlled or modulated by the detector controller <b>425</b> in any number of configurations to detect the signal reflected or emitted by the object <b>450</b>. Non-contact device <b>400</b> may transmit any detected signals to any number of lighting devices <b>110</b> or any other components of the lighting system <b>100</b>.
0175Referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5A</figref> in further detail, non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be any device, apparatus or a unit comprising any type and form of hardware, software, or any combination of hardware and software for non-contact selection or detection by any object. In some embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> is a light switch box or a light switch device or package. Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be any unit, apparatus, system or a component detecting an object <b>450</b>, a signal, a person or any living being within a distance from the non-contact switch. In further embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> detects an object <b>450</b>, a person or a living being without the object <b>450</b>, the person or the living being touching the non-contact switch <b>400</b> physically. In still further embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> detects an object <b>450</b>, a person or a living being with the object <b>450</b>, the person or the living being physically touching or nearly touching the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may comprise a box enclosing a LED <b>405</b>, a light detector <b>420</b> or any other lighting system <b>100</b> component, or more specifically a light non-contact switch <b>400</b> component, such as those displayed in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>. In some embodiments, a non-contact switch <b>400</b> comprises, or is a component of a light fixture installed in a room. The non-contact device <b>400</b> may include any type of processor or processors configured to implement specialized functions for controlling, modulating or configuring any component of the non-contact device <b>400</b>, such as the light detector <b>420</b> or LED <b>405</b>. Non-contact device <b>400</b> may include any type and form of firmware or software instructions operating on the processor or the processors configured for controlling any of the non-contact device <b>400</b> components. In addition to the components illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, non-contact switch <b>400</b> may further include any number of hardware components detecting of any type and form of object, person or a user located at any distance from the non-contact device <b>400</b>. Non-contact device <b>400</b> may be used by a user to control one or more lighting devices, adjust brightness of the light emitted or to select specific lighting devices. In some embodiments, non-contact device <b>400</b> is used to select a particular light source <b>110</b> or a group of light sources <b>110</b> during the configuration the lighting system <b>100</b>. In further embodiments, the user selects one or more light sources <b>110</b> to select or identify specific light sources to be configured a certain way, to be assigned a particular address or to be processed, programmed or controlled in a way determined by the system or the user.
0176Transparent cover <b>460</b> may be any portion of non-contact switch <b>400</b> comprising a material that is transparent to a portion of the light emitted by LED <b>405</b>. Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may comprise an enclosure that may further include any number of additional components, such as the transparent cover <b>460</b>. In some embodiments, transparent cover <b>460</b> comprises a material transparent in the visible or infrared range, such as for example, a glass, a clear plastic or a plexiglass cover. Transparent cover <b>460</b> may further comprise any other material that is transparent or semi-transparent to any light or signal emitted by the LED <b>405</b>. The transparent cover may comprise a filter that filters out wavelengths of light outside of a predetermined range. The transparent cover may reflect a portion of a light, such as for example 0.01, 0.1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 percent of the light, or any other percentage of light between 10 and 90 percent that reach the transparent cover <b>460</b>. The transparent cover <b>460</b> may further include any component or a part of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> that reflects or is capable of reflecting signal emitted from the LED <b>405</b>. Transparent cover <b>460</b> may be opaque to any wavelength of light aside from the light emitted by the LED <b>405</b>. Transparent cover <b>460</b> may comprise an optical filter, filtering, absorbing or reflecting some wavelengths of light and allowing others to pass through. Transparent cover <b>460</b> may be positioned on the enclosure of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> to reflect a specific portion of light from the LED <b>405</b> towards the light detector <b>420</b>. Transparent cover <b>460</b> may comprise a reflective coating to ensure a specific reflectivity, or a reflectivity of a specific percentage or portion of the signal from LED <b>405</b>. In some embodiments, transparent cover <b>460</b> comprises a reflective surface, such as a mirror for example. Transparent cover may be positioned anywhere within the non-contact switch <b>400</b> or outside of the switch <b>400</b>. In some embodiments, transparent cover <b>460</b> is a component of the enclosure of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>.
0177Transparent cover <b>460</b> may allow only a portion of light to propagate through the transparent cover while reflecting a fraction of the light. In some embodiments, transparent cover reflects between 10 and 20, 20 and 30, 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90 and 90 and 99.99 percent of the signal. The transparent cover may also propagate, transmit or allow transmission of any portion of the signal such as for example, 99.99 and 95, 95 and 90, 90 and 80, 80 and 70, 70 and 60, 60 and 50, 50 and 40, 40 and 30, 30 and 20, 20 and 10, or 10 and 0.01 percent of the signal. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 0 and 1 percent of light, such as for example 0.2, 0.4, 0.6 or 0.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 1 and 2 percent of light, such as for example 1.2, 1.4, 1.6 or 1.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 2 and 3 percent of light, such as for example 2.2, 2.4, 2.6 or 2.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 3 and 4 percent of light, such as for example 3.2, 3.4, 3.6 or 3.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 4 and 5 percent of light, such as for example 4.2, 4.4, 4.6 or 4.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 5 and 6 percent of light, such as for example 5.2, 5.4, 5.6 or 5.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 6 and 7 percent of light, such as for example 6.2, 6.4, 6.6 or 6.8 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b> reaching the transparent cover. In further embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 7-10 percent of light emitted by the LED <b>405</b>. In further embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 10 and 20 percent of light, or between 20 and 30, 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90 or 90 and 99.99 percent for example. Transparent cover <b>460</b> may comprise any component, or any group of components of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> that reflect, refract, permeate or propagate any portion of the signal emitted by LED <b>405</b>.
0178LED <b>405</b> of the non-contact device <b>400</b> may be any type and form of an apparatus, component or a device emitting or producing an electromagnetic signal. LED <b>405</b> may be positioned or deployed anywhere within or around any lighting system <b>110</b> component. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is light source <b>110</b>. In other embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is a semiconductor light emitting diode. In further embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is a component producing a wireless signal. In still further embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is a unit producing a radio or an RF (radio frequency) signal. LED <b>405</b> may emit or generate an electromagnetic wave of any wavelength, power or spectral range. In still further embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is an infra red light emitting diode or source. LED <b>405</b> may be a light emitting source that emits light of constant intensity or varying intensity. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is a light emitting diode emitting a time dependent intensity or power varying signal. In further embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is a flickering light emitting device. LED <b>405</b> may emit an amplitude modulated, frequency modulated, phase modulated, pulse width modulated or any signal or output of single or multi-level modulation scheme or type. LED <b>405</b> may further comprise any number of light sources or light emitting devices. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> comprises an array of light emitting diodes, laser diodes, lamps, bulbs or any other type or form of electromagnetic wave emitting devices. LED <b>405</b> may include a number of similar or different light emitting devices, sources, diodes or any other components which may or may not be associated with a light source <b>110</b>.
0179Different light sources within the LED <b>405</b> may emit signals at different power ranges, different spectral ranges, different intensities and signals with no modulations or signals modulated with various types of modulation schemes. LED <b>405</b> may further include a second light emitting source emitting a light signal intended to help control or modulate the gain circuitry, such as gain circuit <b>470</b>, of the light detector <b>420</b>. The noise signal light source may emit light at a specific average intensity and a specific spectral range to maintain the gain feedback circuitry, such as the gain circuit <b>470</b>, of the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific sensitivity range. Such sensitivity range of the light detector <b>420</b>, based on the intensity and the spectral range of the signal, may enable the light detector <b>420</b> to detect an object <b>450</b> at a specific distance or distance range from the non-contact device <b>400</b>. The total light of the LED <b>405</b> may include the first light source emitting the modulated and controlled signal and the second light source emitting the noise or the background signal for modulating the gain of the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> includes two or more LED <b>405</b> components, each of which may include any functionality or embodiment of any other LED <b>405</b>.
0180LED <b>405</b> may include any number of sources that emit pulsed signals at a specific frequency or at a number of specific frequencies or frequency ranges. For example, light emitted by one or more sources of the LED <b>405</b> may have a spectral ranges in the visible, near infra red, infra red or far infra red range. The light emitted may also be modulated in bursts or pulses occurring for a specific duration of time at a specific frequency or a range of frequencies. In some embodiments, light emitted may be random and constant light. In further embodiments, signal comprises light in x-ray range, visible range, near infrared range, mid infrared range, a far infrared range or radio wavelength range.
0181The signal may comprise light having any spectral range, such as between 1 and 5 nanometers, 5 and 10 nanometers, 10 and 15 nanometers, 15 and 20 nanometers, 20 and 25 nanometers, 25 and 30 nanometers, 30 and 40 nanometers, 40 and 60 nanometers, 60 and 80 nanometers, 80 and 100 nanometers, 100 and 400 nanometers or 400 and 2000 or more nanometers. In still further embodiments, signal comprises pulses or bursts of signal which may occur at a carrier frequency. The carrier frequency may be any frequency, such as for example, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 or 60 kilohertz. In still further embodiments, the carrier frequency may include any frequency between 100 hertz and 1 kilohertz, 1 kilohertz and 5 kilohertz, 5 kilohertz and 20 kilohertz, 20 kilohertz and 50 kilohertz, 50 kilohertz and 70 kilohertz, 70 kilohertz and 150 kilohertz, 150 kilohertz and 300 kilohertz, 300 kilohertz and 1 megahertz, 1 megahertz and 10 megahertz, 10 megahertz and 100 megahertz, or 100 megahertz and 1000 megahertz. The signal may comprise modulation such as frequency, phase, amplitude or pulse width modulation. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency of the signal is in the range of 30-35 kilohertz. In further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 35-40 kilohertz. In still further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 40-45 kilohertz. In yet further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 45-100 kilohertz. The signal may be emitted within any conical angle from the LED, such as between 1 and 3 degrees, 3 and 5 degrees, 5 and 10 degrees, 10 and 20 degrees, 20 and 30 degrees, 30 and 40 degrees, 40 and 50 degrees, 50 and 60 degrees, 60 and 70 degrees, 70 and 80 degrees, 80 and 90 degrees, 90 and 100 degrees, 100 and 110 degrees, 110 and 120 degrees, 120 and 130 degrees, 130 and 140 degrees, 140 and 150 degrees, 150 and 180 degrees, 180 and 220 degrees, 220 and 250 degrees, 250 and 270 degrees and 270 and 360 degrees. In a plurality of embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits pulses of light wherein the pulses occur within any frequency range. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits pulses of light wherein the pulses have a specific duty cycle. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits an electromagnetic signal that is modulated and controlled by LED controller <b>410</b>. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is positioned inside the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In other embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is positioned outside of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is positioned or installed on or within a lighting device <b>110</b>. In further embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is positioned near a lighting system <b>100</b> component, such as a lighting device <b>110</b>. In still further embodiments, LED <b>405</b> is positioned on a wall of a room that is illuminated by a lighting device <b>110</b>.
0182Gain circuit <b>470</b> may be any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software that controls, modulates or maintains performance or operation of LED <b>405</b> or light detector <b>420</b>. Gain circuit <b>470</b> may include logic circuits, or software operating on one or more processors to control or manage how signals from the LED <b>405</b> are detected by light source <b>410</b>. Gain circuit <b>470</b> may utilize a fraction of light reflected by the transparent cover <b>460</b> towards the light detector <b>420</b> to maintain the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific detection range. In some embodiments, gain circuit <b>470</b> manages or controls detection of light detector <b>410</b> of any signal, including the signal from the LED <b>405</b> or from any other light source, such as for example an emitter of object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, gain circuit may be comprised by any component of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>, such as an LED <b>405</b>, light detector <b>420</b>, LED controller <b>410</b> or detector controller <b>425</b>. Gain circuit <b>470</b> may be connected in a feedback loop with the light detector <b>420</b> or the LED <b>405</b>.
0183The gain circuit <b>470</b> may maintain the light detector <b>420</b> at a specific detection threshold or detection range. The gain circuit may be configured to provide real-time adjustments to the light detector <b>420</b> so that the signal detected by the light detector <b>420</b> may be maintained within a specific operating range of the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, the gain circuit <b>470</b> maintains a feedback loop with the light detector <b>420</b> to maintain the detecting range of the light detector <b>420</b> at a specific detection range, such as slightly below a threshold level of the detection of the light detector <b>420</b>. As ambient light, such as background noise light, increases in intensity, the gain circuit <b>470</b> may compensate and adjust to still maintain the gain of the light detector <b>420</b> within the specific range. Following the adjustment by the gain circuit <b>470</b>, light detector <b>420</b> would still adjust and maintain the sensitivity to the presence of object <b>450</b>. For example, when there is a lot of ambient light in the room where non-contact switch <b>400</b> is installed, gain circuit <b>470</b> may decrease the gain of the light detector <b>420</b> to compensate for the increased ambient light. In the instance where the object <b>450</b> is brought within a specific distance from the non-contact device <b>400</b>, the reflected portion of the LED <b>405</b> signal may increase the amount of the detected signal slightly above the threshold. The light detector <b>420</b> may then detect the presence of the object <b>450</b> as the threshold has been exceeded by the portion of the signal reflected by the object <b>450</b>. Normally, the gain circuit <b>470</b> may compensate for any changes in ambient light by setting and maintain the light detector <b>420</b> within the detection range just below the detectable threshold. However, as the present object <b>450</b> reflects a substantial amount of light towards the light detector <b>420</b>, the gain circuit <b>470</b> may not compensate for such a great increase in light intensity fast enough and the object <b>450</b> may be detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. As such, gain circuit <b>470</b> may control the sensitivity of the signal detected by light detector <b>420</b> such that compensates for changes in ambient light or background noise but does not lose sensitivity to the presence of the object <b>450</b>. The gain circuit <b>470</b> may control the light detector <b>420</b> such that the light detector <b>420</b> it is not oversensitive to detect the presence of the object <b>450</b> when the object <b>450</b> is not present within a predetermined distance from the non-contact device <b>400</b>. The gain circuit of any of the LED <b>405</b>, LED controller <b>410</b>, detector controller <b>425</b> or light detector <b>420</b> may perform any functionality or include any embodiments of any of the gain circuits of the LED <b>405</b>, LED controller <b>410</b>, light detector <b>420</b> and detector controller <b>425</b>.
0184In some embodiments, gain circuit <b>470</b> includes an average intensity filter, a frequency filter and a comparator. The average intensity filter of the gain circuit <b>470</b> may monitor the average intensity of the signal detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. The average intensity filter may further filter out intensity of signal that is below or above a predetermined threshold intensity. In some embodiments, average intensity filter may only allow the signals that are within a predetermined range of the average intensities to pass through the filter. For example, if average intensity of light received by the light detector <b>420</b> is below a predetermined intensity threshold, the average intensity may filter out the signal. As such, the average intensity filter may filter out signals outside of the predetermined range. Just as with average intensity filter, the frequency filter of the gain circuit <b>470</b> may filter out any signal that is outside of a predetermined frequency range. In some embodiments, the frequency signal filters out signals that have carrier frequency outside of the allowed frequency range. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency range of allowed signals may be any signals that have pulses or carrier frequency between 30 and 50 kilohertz. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency range of allowed signals may be around 40 kilohertz, such as 41 or 42 kilohertz for example. Comparator of the gain circuit <b>470</b> may compare the signals that passed through the average intensity filter and the frequency filter against a threshold. The comparator may compare the signal filtered by the average intensity filter and the frequency filter against a predetermined threshold or a predetermined threshold range. If the comparator detects that the signal exceeds the threshold the object <b>450</b> is detected. Similarly, in set-ups where the comparator compares the signal that is lower than a predetermined threshold, the object <b>450</b> is detected if the signal is lower than the predetermined threshold. Gain circuit <b>470</b> may use any one of, or any combination of, the average intensity filter, frequency filter and a comparator together with any automatic gain controller circuit to control the detection of the light detector <b>420</b>.
0185LED controller <b>410</b> may be any device, unit, component or a function for controlling, managing or driving LED <b>405</b>. LED controller <b>410</b> may include any hardware, software or any combination of hardware and software for controlling, driving or enabling emitting of light by one or more LED <b>405</b>. LED controller <b>410</b> may be a device, product or a system controlling, maintaining or enabling functionality or operation of LED <b>405</b>. In some embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> comprises a processing unit configured or comprising specific instructions for controlling, adjusting, maintaining or enabling functionality or operation of LED <b>405</b>, such as signal or light emitting. In many embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> comprises analog or digital circuitry for controlling, maintaining, adjusting or enabling functionality of LED <b>405</b>. In further embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> comprises switches, latches or transistor circuitry which switch LED <b>405</b> on or off. In a plurality or embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> comprises monitoring circuitry monitoring and observing performance or functionality of LED <b>405</b>. In many embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> comprises modulating circuitry, gain circuitry or circuitry for maintaining the detector within a specific gain range or detection range. Sometimes, LED controller <b>410</b> modulates, adjusts or changes state, status or performance of LED <b>405</b> in response to the monitored or observed performance or functionality of LED <b>405</b>.
0186In some embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> may include gain circuitry, such as gain circuit <b>470</b>, adjustment of gain of the signal emitted by the LED and detected by the light detector <b>420</b> in order to maintain the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific detection range. The adjustment may be real-time adjustment. Gain circuit <b>470</b> may be comprised by any component of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. For example, a gain circuitry of the LED controller <b>410</b> may maintain the output at a specific threshold or within a specific range. The gain circuit <b>470</b> of the LED controller <b>410</b> may control the properties of the electromagnetic signal emitted by the LED <b>405</b> such that the light detector <b>420</b> is maintained slightly below a detection range threshold. By maintaining the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific range, the light detector <b>420</b> may be controlled such that the reflected signal reaching the detector is below the detectable threshold unless an object <b>450</b> is placed within a predetermined distance from the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. LED controller <b>410</b> may modulate current, voltage or power to LED <b>405</b> to maintain the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific threshold or operating range as desired by the configuration of distance within which the object <b>450</b> may be detected. In some embodiments, gain circuitry may be adjusted so that object <b>450</b> is detected at a greater distance. In other embodiments, gain circuitry is adjusted so that the object <b>450</b> is detected at a distance very close to the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. The distance may be any distance ranging from 1 millimeter, 2 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 1 centimeter, 2 centimeters, 5 centimeters, 10 centimeters, 20 centimeters, 50 centimeters, 70 centimeters, 1 meter, 2 meters, 5 meters, 10 meters, 20 meters or any other distance desired by the user. In some embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> comprises functionality which scales up or scales down the gain of the LED <b>405</b> using a dial, a button or a setting. In some embodiments, software operating on a processor of the LED controller <b>410</b> monitors and modulates the gain of the light emitted by one or more light sources of the LED <b>405</b> to maintain light detector <b>420</b> within a specific operating detection range. The gain circuitry of the LED controller <b>410</b> may be adjusted in response to background noise to compensate for increased or decreased background noise.
0187LED controller <b>410</b> may modulate, control or adjust LED <b>405</b> operation such that LED <b>405</b> emits or generates light of a specific wavelength, power or intensity range as controlled by the LED controller <b>410</b>. In a number of embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> modulates, adjusts or controls LED <b>405</b> such that LED <b>405</b> emits one or more signals of a specific intensity controlled by LED controller <b>410</b>. In many embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> modulates, adjusts or controls LED <b>405</b> such that LED <b>405</b> emits light in pulses occurring at a specific frequency. In some embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> modulates LED <b>405</b> to emit light within the infra red wavelength range. In many embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light within infra-red wavelength range. In a plurality of embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light having a spectral range of less than 100 nanometers. In many embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light having a spectral range of less than 50 nanometers. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light having a spectral range of less than 10 nanometers. In a number of embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light having a spectral range of about 5 nanometers or less than 5 nanometers. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light having a spectral range of about one or two nanometers of full width at half maximum of the signal. In a number of embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits light having a spectral range of less than one nanometer.
0188LED <b>405</b> may include a plurality of light sources, one of which acts as a light source emitting a background noise signal. In some embodiments, a non-contact switch <b>400</b> comprises a plurality of LEDs <b>405</b>. A first one of the LEDs <b>405</b> may emit a pulsed signal designated to be the signal that the light detector <b>420</b> detects and interprets. This signal may be the signal to be reflected off of the object <b>450</b> and detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. The second one of the LEDs <b>405</b> may emit a constant low intensity signal, such as a synthetic background noise signal. Synthetic noise may be noise generated by LED <b>405</b> to suppress any background noise created by the environment. The synthetic noise signal may be in the general intensity or power range or in an intensity or power range that is larger than the intensity or power range of the background signal of the environment coming from outside of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. The synthetic background noise or background noise signal produced by the second LED <b>405</b> may be any signal within a wavelength and power range detectable by the light detector <b>420</b>. By having a stronger synthetic constant background noise signal transmitted by one or more LEDs <b>405</b>, any additional less intense background noise signals from the environment may be not as damaging to the communications of the LED <b>405</b>. In one example, a first LED <b>405</b> emits a high intensity signal via which the light switch enclosure <b>400</b> detects the presence of the object <b>450</b>. The second LED <b>405</b> of the same or a different light switch enclosure may emit a lower intensity signal than the signal emitted by the first LED <b>405</b>. The second LED <b>405</b> signal may have an intensity that is higher than a common or expected background noise from the environment. Both, the first and the second LEDs <b>405</b>, may emit signals that are electromagnetic signals within a frequency, power or intensity range that is detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. The light detector <b>420</b> may detect both signals. As background noise is generated from the environment, the second LED <b>405</b> emitting a stronger signal in this wavelength range than the background noise, may in suppress the background noise. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> comprises a Rohm or Sharp surface mount infrared emitting component, such as for example a Rohm palm device component emitting infrared light at pulses of around 40 kilohertz.
0189Light detector <b>420</b> may be any device, component or a unit detecting or sensing any electromagnetic signal or wave. Light detector <b>420</b> may include or comprise any type and form of hardware, software or combination of software and hardware for sensing or detecting light or optical signal. In some embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> senses light or an electromagnetic wave and produces a voltage or a current proportional to the intensity or the power of the light or the electromagnetic wave sensed. The light detector <b>420</b> may detect emission or radiation of any type and form, of any frequency and of any power or wavelength range. Light detector <b>420</b> includes a semiconductor detector, such as a silicon detector or a Gallium Arsenide detector. In some embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> includes a diode, such as a photodiode. In some embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> detects or senses heat or infra red radiation or signals. In other embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> includes a sensor for detecting light within a room that is illuminated by a lighting device <b>110</b>. In another embodiment, light detector <b>420</b> includes a sensor detecting ambient light. In other embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> includes a color sensor for sensing a color of light or a wavelength of light. In yet further embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> is a color temperature sensor for detecting color temperature of a light source. In still further embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> senses or detects chromaticity of light. In a number of embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> detects an electromagnetic signal within the frequency or wavelength range of the signal emitted by the LED <b>405</b>. For example, light detector <b>420</b> may be tuned to collect any radiation having spectral or modulation characteristics of the signal emitted by LED <b>405</b> in order to detect if an object <b>450</b> is present. The object <b>450</b> may be detected by the detector <b>420</b> due to the object <b>450</b> reflecting the signal from the LED <b>405</b> to the light detector <b>420</b>. In such instances, light detector <b>420</b> may detect the presence of an object <b>450</b> when object <b>450</b> is within a specific distance from the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, light source <b>420</b> is a sound or acoustic wave sensor detecting sound or acoustic signals. In some embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> detects RF or radio frequency signals.
0190In still further embodiments, light source <b>420</b> detects any type, form or configuration of a signal that may be affected by presence of an object <b>450</b> within a perimeter of the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> detects or senses near infra red signals, such as the signals emitted by a remote control. In still further embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> detects or senses wireless transmission signals, such as the signals of a wireless internet connection generally received by wireless network cards of computers and laptops. In various embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> comprises any functionality of any other lighting system <b>100</b> component. Light detector <b>420</b> may be detecting modulation of the light oscillating at a carrier frequency. The carrier frequency may be any carrier frequency, such as a carrier frequency of about 40 kilohertz. In some embodiments, light detector <b>420</b> comprises a Panasonic receiver, such PNA4602 receiver.
0191Detector controller <b>425</b> may be any device controlling or managing operation or functionality of the light detector <b>420</b>. Detector controller <b>425</b> may be any device, unit or component processing or modifying the output signal of the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> is a device, product or a system controlling, configuring or managing the light detector <b>420</b>. In other embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> comprises hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for controlling, adjusting or maintaining functionality of one or more light detectors <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> comprises analog or digital circuitry for controlling, maintaining, adjusting or enabling functionality of the light detector <b>420</b>. In further embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> comprises switches, latches or transistor circuitry which controls or modulates light detector <b>420</b>. Detector controller <b>425</b> may comprise monitoring circuitry which uses a software running on a processor of the detector controller <b>425</b> to receive, process or modify the output signal of the light detector <b>420</b>. For example, output signal of a light detector <b>420</b> may be sent to the detector controller <b>425</b>, which may use any functionality to determine if the received signal signifies the presence of an object <b>450</b> within a predetermined perimeter from the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, light detector controller <b>425</b> may use the light detector <b>420</b> output signal to determine performance, operation or action of the lighting device <b>110</b>. For example, if a light detector <b>420</b> detects a signal affected by an object <b>450</b>, detector controller <b>425</b> may process the signal and determine that an object <b>450</b> is present. The detector controller <b>425</b> may in response to the determination that the object <b>450</b> is present sent a signal to the lighting device <b>110</b> or any other component of the lighting system <b>100</b>. The lighting device <b>110</b> may, in response to the signal from the detector controller <b>425</b>, start emitting light, stop emitting light or change the intensity, color or any other configuration of the light emitted.
0192Detector controller <b>425</b> may receive and monitor current or voltage output signals from any number of light detectors <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> receives current or voltage output signal from one or more light detectors <b>420</b> and converts the current or the voltage signal into a digital signal. Sometimes, detector controller <b>425</b> processes current or voltage output signal from one or more light detectors <b>420</b>. In various embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> adjusts one or more functionalities or performance characteristics of one or more light detectors <b>420</b> in response to the received current or voltage output signal received. In a plurality of embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> may form and transmit commands or instructions, such as instructions <b>650</b>, to any lighting device <b>110</b>. Detector controller <b>425</b> may send communication or receive communication from other lighting system <b>100</b> components, as desired or as necessary. In some embodiments, detector controller <b>425</b> includes any functionality of any other lighting system <b>100</b> component, such as the lighting device <b>110</b>.
0193Object <b>450</b> may be any type and form of an object, such as a book, a chair, a door, a pen, a signal, a human being or any other living being. Object <b>450</b> may be an object capable of changing, modifying or affecting the signal detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. Object <b>450</b> may be a person or a part of a person, such as a person's hand. Object <b>450</b> may be a signal emitter emitting an electromagnetic signal, such as a remote controller, light emitter or a radio emitter. In some embodiments, object <b>450</b> is a person that reflects a signal into the light detector <b>420</b> of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> by walking into a room that has a light non-contact switch <b>400</b> installed on a wall. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> emits an electromagnetic signal which is reflected off of the person and detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. The light detector <b>420</b> may detect the presence of the person in the room and send the signal to the detector controller <b>425</b> which in turn may send an instruction to lighting devices <b>110</b> in the room to turn on and emit light.
0194Object <b>450</b> may be a device or an apparatus emitting a signal. In some embodiments, object <b>450</b> is an emitter such as a remote controller that emits an infra red signal detected by the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. The signal may be detected by the light detector <b>420</b> and the light from the lighting devices <b>110</b> may be turned on. In still further embodiments, object <b>450</b> may be any object, person or a device intercepting, reflecting or affecting the signal detected or sensed by the light detector <b>420</b>. Object <b>450</b> may be any object reflecting a portion of light emitted by LED <b>405</b> toward light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, object <b>450</b> emits an electromagnetic signal, heat, acoustic or sound signal, a wireless signal, radio signal or any type and form of signal that the light detector <b>420</b> detects. In some embodiments, object <b>450</b> creates an interference or obstruction to an intensity, phase, frequency or amplitude of a signal detected by light detector <b>420</b>. Object <b>450</b> may create an obstruction or a lapse in the signal amplitude, phase, frequency or intensity, which may be detected by a light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, object <b>450</b> reflects a signal such that the light detector <b>420</b> detects the reflected signal in an increasing fashion as the object <b>450</b> approaches the light detector <b>420</b>.
0195The components of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>, such as the LED <b>405</b>, LED controller <b>410</b>, light detector <b>420</b> and the detector controller <b>425</b> may each include one or more gain circuits to adjust the amount of light from the LED <b>405</b> to be detected by the light detector <b>410</b>. In one example, a gain circuit of a LED <b>405</b> may adjust and control the output light of the LED <b>405</b> to maintain the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific operating range. The specific operating range may be a range of operation of the LED <b>405</b> or light detector <b>420</b> or both such that the light detector <b>410</b> detects the light from the LED <b>405</b> with a specific sensitivity. For example, the gain circuit may cause the LED <b>405</b> to emit just enough light to enable the light detector <b>420</b> to barely detect portions of the light from the LED <b>405</b> reaching the light detector <b>410</b>. The portions of light may be the fraction of light reflected from a transparent or a semi-transparent portion of an enclosure of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>, such as a transparent cover. The transparent cover may include glass or a plexiglass portion that reflects the light towards detector <b>420</b>. The gain circuit may maintain the amount of light detected by the light detector <b>420</b> just below the threshold of the presence of the object <b>450</b>. The presence of the object <b>450</b> may then provide an additional amount of reflection reaching the light detector <b>420</b>, thus exceeding the threshold of detection. Once the threshold is exceeded the light detector <b>420</b> may send the signal that object <b>450</b> has been detected.
0196Similarly in another example, a gain circuit of light detector <b>420</b> may adjust and control the detection settings of the light detector <b>420</b> to maintain the light detector <b>420</b> within a specific operating range. The gain circuit may cause the light detector <b>420</b> to detect light with a specific sensitivity or configuration to enable the light detector <b>420</b> to detect portions of the light from the LED <b>405</b> just below the detection threshold of the light detector <b>420</b>. As such, the light detector <b>420</b> may detect absence of any object <b>450</b> from the perimeter of the non-contact switch <b>450</b>. In the instance that the object <b>450</b> approaches the non-contact switch <b>400</b>, the object <b>450</b> will detect an additional amount of the signal from the LED <b>405</b> back into the light detector <b>420</b>. The gain circuit maintaining the amount of light detected by the light detector <b>420</b>, may experience a rising signal which will be too strong to be compensated for by the gain circuit quickly enough and the light detector <b>410</b> will detect the presence of the object <b>450</b>. Similarly, gain circuits may be deployed in the led controller <b>410</b> or detector controller <b>425</b> in any orientation. The gain circuits may control the sensitivity of the light detector <b>420</b> or the gain circuits may control the intensity, power, pulse frequency, carrier frequency or even wavelength of the light emitted from LED <b>405</b> to enable and control the detection of the object <b>450</b> when present.
0197Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be used by any number of users to control, manage or configure a lighting system <b>100</b> as well as to communicate with one or more of lighting system <b>100</b> components. Sometimes, light non-contact switch <b>400</b> is configured to perform a set of tasks enabling user communication with a lighting system <b>100</b>. In some embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> is configured or tuned to perform sensing of a user's presence. In many embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> is configured or tuned to enable a user to control light intensity, light color, pulsing or other performance characteristics of light sources <b>110</b>. In many embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> is configured or tuned to enable a user to select a group of light sources <b>110</b> and control them separately from other light sources <b>100</b>. In some embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> components are tuned and configured to operate based on frequency of pulses of signal at a specific predetermined frequency. In some embodiments, light non-contact switch <b>400</b> components are tuned and configured to emit and/or detect pulses of signal at a specific predetermined intensity. In still further embodiments, light non-contact switch <b>400</b> components are tuned and configured to emit and/or detect pulses of signal within a specific predetermined spectral range.
0198For example, non-contact switch <b>400</b> components may be tuned and configured to emit and/or detect the signal at a specific predetermined combination of frequency, intensity, wavelength or modulation. Upon placing an object <b>450</b> in the vicinity of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> component, any feature of the signal, such as the intensity, frequency, wavelength or format, may be interrupted and the interruption may be detected by the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, LED controller <b>410</b> modulates LED <b>405</b> to emit or generate pulses or bursts of electromagnetic, acoustic or other wireless signal at a specific frequency and a specific intensity. Light detector <b>420</b> may be modulated by detector controller <b>425</b> to detect the signals emitted by the LED <b>405</b> at the frequency and intensity range emitted by the LED <b>405</b>. The detector controller <b>425</b> may modulate the light detector <b>420</b> by user configuration, frequency or resistance adjustment, programming of the detector controller <b>425</b>, setting up configuration inputs or any other user action or activity. Detector controller <b>425</b> may process the signals from the light detector <b>420</b> in accordance with configuration settings and alert other lighting system <b>100</b> components when the object <b>450</b> is in the vicinity. In some embodiments, signals emitted by LED <b>405</b> may be adjusted to include pulse frequency, signal intensity, signal wavelength and modulation format which are all within detectable range of the light detector <b>410</b>. The light detector <b>410</b> may continuously, periodically or randomly check for the signal presence. The signal being maintained by the gain circuit within a specific range just below a detectable threshold range of the light detector <b>410</b> may signify that the object <b>450</b> is not within the vicinity. However, when the object <b>450</b> is within the vicinity the signal reflected off of the object <b>450</b> and reaching the light detector <b>410</b> may increase and exceed the threshold. Light detector <b>410</b> may then detect the presence of the object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, object <b>450</b> may interrupt or change the intensity, power, frequency, wavelength or modulation of the signal emitted from the LED <b>405</b>. Light detector <b>410</b> may detect such changes and interpret the detection as the presence of the object <b>450</b>.
0199The threshold distance or distance range within which the non-contact switch <b>400</b> components detect the presence of object <b>450</b> may be configured by any configuration method. In some embodiments, the user configures the threshold or distance range by setting the distance or relative position or direction of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> components, such as the LED <b>405</b> and light detector <b>420</b>. In further embodiments, the threshold or distance range may be set by choosing a duration of pulse and the frequency of pulses emitted by LED <b>405</b>. In still further embodiments, the threshold or distance range may be set by selecting a spectral range of the light emitted by LED <b>405</b>, as well as the average intensity of the light emitted. In other embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> includes a configuration tool which enables the user to configure the vicinity range or threshold within which the object <b>450</b> is detected. In some embodiments, the threshold or the range of the vicinity or distance within which the object <b>450</b> is detected is preset or preconfigured by the manufacturer. In further embodiments, the threshold range or the distance range of the vicinity may be adjusted by a button, setting, dial or an input on the light switch enclosure <b>400</b> or any other lighting system <b>100</b> component.
0200The vicinity or range within which the object <b>450</b> is detected by the non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be as any range or threshold of distance. In some embodiments, the vicinity is any length between the object <b>450</b> and the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In some embodiments, the vicinity is any distance or range of about 1, 2, 5, 10 or 15 centimeters. In further embodiments, the vicinity is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 millimeters. In further embodiments, vicinity is a distance of 15, 20, 20, 30, 40 or 50 centimeters. In other embodiments, vicinity is a range or a threshold of distance of between 50 centimeters and 1 meter. In further embodiments, vicinity is a range of between 1 and 10 meters. Vicinity may be configured by configuring or adjusting the output signal characteristics of the LED <b>405</b> and detectable range and performance of light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, vicinity may be altered by the user using configuration schemes, settings, programs or inputs for the light switch enclosure <b>400</b> or lighting system <b>100</b>. In many embodiments, vicinity is a range or threshold of distance which is constant and predetermined for a specific non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In other embodiments, vicinity is a range or threshold of distance which may vary depending on the configuration, user inputs and signals or instructions from other lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0201Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may communicate to other lighting system <b>100</b> components by sending or receiving signals or instructions. In some embodiments, LED <b>405</b> of a first light switch enclosure transmits communication to a second light switch enclosure <b>400</b>. The light detector <b>420</b> of the second light switch enclosure <b>400</b> may detect the signal emitted by the LED <b>405</b> of the first light switch enclosure <b>400</b>. The second light switch enclosure <b>400</b> may process or forward the instruction <b>650</b> to one or more lighting devices <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, both the first and the second enclosures <b>650</b> are associated with one or more lighting devices <b>110</b>. When a first light switch enclosure <b>400</b> transmits a transmission, such as an instruction <b>650</b> via LED <b>405</b>, the second light switch enclosure <b>400</b> may receive the transmission and forward it to the one or more lighting devices <b>110</b> associated with the second light switch enclosure <b>400</b>. The one or more lighting devices <b>110</b> may implement the instruction <b>650</b> or operate in accordance to the instructions received. In some embodiments, a plurality of light switch enclosures <b>400</b> are configured to be in communication with one or more lighting devices <b>110</b>. The master lighting device <b>110</b> may transmit an instruction <b>650</b> to any number of the plurality of lighting devices <b>110</b> via it's own non-contact switch <b>400</b>. The signal, such as the instruction <b>650</b>, may be transmitted wirelessly via the LED <b>405</b> and the plurality of light switch enclosures <b>400</b> may receive the instruction <b>650</b> and forward the instructions <b>650</b> to the lighting devices <b>110</b> to implement the instruction <b>650</b>.
0202Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may further communicate with one or more light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, components of the non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be associated with one or more light sources <b>110</b>. For example, a light source <b>110</b> may comprise components of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>, such as the LED <b>405</b> or the light detector <b>420</b>. Non-contact switches <b>400</b> may be used for assigning of unique digital addresses to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, a non-contact switch <b>400</b> is used to assign a unique digital address to a lighting device <b>110</b> that is connected to a switch <b>400</b>. In further embodiments, a non-contact switch <b>400</b> is used to assign a unique digital address to a plurality of lighting devices <b>110</b> that are connected to or in communication with the light switch enclosure <b>400</b>. Assigning of the unique digital address may be done by sending an instruction or a command via connections <b>105</b> to all the lighting devices <b>110</b> connected. The instruction or the command may be any instruction <b>650</b> that indicates that a lighting device <b>110</b> will be assigned an unique digital address. The same or another instruction may be transmitted identifying a first unique digital address, or the first address <b>127</b> to all the lighting devices <b>110</b>. A user may place a hand, or any other object <b>450</b>, within the vicinity of a switch <b>400</b> associated with a particular lighting device <b>110</b>. The light detector <b>420</b> of the light switch enclosure <b>400</b> may detect the presence of the hand and send the signal to the lighting device <b>110</b> associated with the light switch enclosure <b>400</b>. The receipt of the signal by the lighting device <b>110</b> will indicate to the lighting device <b>110</b> that the user has identified that particular lighting device <b>110</b> as the lighting device <b>110</b> to be assigned the first address <b>127</b>. This particular lighting device <b>110</b> may then save the address <b>127</b> and use the address <b>127</b> for communicating with any other lighting devices <b>110</b> on the network of lighting devices <b>110</b>. In such or similar manner the user may identify other lighting devices <b>110</b> and assign to them any particular unique digital addresses or addresses <b>127</b>. The user may also assign to a group of lighting devices <b>110</b> one address <b>127</b>, such that entire group will behave and act in accordance with instructions or commands transmitted along with that particular address <b>127</b>.
0203Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be used for assigning a master or slave status to any lighting device <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, the user may select a master or slave status by placing a hand in the vicinity of the light switch enclosures <b>400</b> associated with particular lighting devices <b>110</b>. A component of a lighting system <b>100</b> may receive an instruction or a signal that the lighting system <b>110</b> is placed into an assignment mode. An assignment mode may be any mode of operation of the lighting system <b>100</b> wherein the lighting system <b>100</b> assigns an addresses <b>127</b> or a status, such as slave or master status, to one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components. In some embodiments, an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of a lighting system <b>100</b> to assign an addresses <b>127</b> to any lighting system <b>100</b> component. In other embodiments, an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of a lighting system <b>100</b> to assign an master or a slave status to any lighting system <b>100</b> component. In yet further embodiments, an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of a lighting system <b>100</b> to assign any number of lighting devices to a group. Assignment mode may be a mode of operation or configuration in which the lighting system <b>100</b> allows the user to select via non-contact switch <b>400</b> associated with light sources <b>110</b> the light sources <b>110</b> will be assigned to specific statuses, specific groups or specific addresses <b>127</b>. When the lighting system <b>100</b> is placed in the assignment mode, the lighting system may send a group assigning instruction to each lighting device <b>110</b>. The user may select via non-contact switch <b>400</b> which of the lighting devices will be assigned to this particular group. Following the selection, the user may exit the assignment mode and each selected light source <b>110</b> may be saved into the group as selected. Similarly, the user may assign addresses <b>127</b> or master and slave statuses to each of the lighting devices <b>110</b>.
0204Assignment mode, implemented by a non-contact switch <b>400</b>, may be any function or a setting of any of the lighting system <b>100</b> components, such as a function, a feature or a setting implemented by any of a controller <b>120</b>, a communicator <b>125</b>, a master/slave addressor <b>130</b>, a power supply <b>140</b> or a light source <b>110</b>. Assignment mode may include a software, a hardware or a combination of software and hardware for implementing tasks relating to assignment of addresses <b>127</b> for each of the lighting system <b>100</b> components. Assignment mode may include a means for transmitting or receiving messages from each of the lighting system <b>100</b> components who have received and accepted the addresses <b>127</b>. Assignment mode may further receive confirmation messages from the lighting devices <b>110</b> that were selected by the user via non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In some embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components store the address <b>127</b> received from the master and transmit the confirmation messages to the master lighting device <b>110</b>. The master lighting device <b>110</b> may then be aware which lighting devices have accepted and saved the address <b>127</b> the user has selected. The master lighting device <b>127</b> may send any further communication of these devices using the addresses <b>127</b> assigned. In some embodiments, the master lighting device <b>110</b> transmits one of a plurality of addresses <b>127</b> to each of the lighting system <b>100</b> components and waits for the lighting system <b>100</b> components to accept the address <b>127</b> transmitted. The lighting system <b>100</b> components may accept the address <b>127</b> upon receiving the signal from a non-contact switch <b>400</b> as selected by the user. Those lighting system <b>100</b> components selected by the user may return to the master lighting device <b>110</b> the confirmation messages indicating that these lighting system <b>100</b> component have accepted the addresses <b>127</b>. Similarly, the master lighting device <b>110</b> may send out group assignment signals to the lighting devices <b>110</b> in the network. The lighting devices <b>110</b> may, upon receiving signals from the non-contact switch <b>400</b> that an object <b>450</b> was detected, send to the master lighting device the confirmation signals that the user has selected these lighting devices <b>110</b> to be in the same group. The group may be assigned a special group address <b>127</b>, or a group identifier. Such a group address or a group identifier may be used to control the group of lighting devices <b>110</b> selected by the user in the future. In one example, light source <b>110</b>A accepting address <b>127</b>A previously sent by the master receives a signal from a light switch enclosure that a user's presence, or an object <b>450</b>, was detected. The light source <b>110</b>A sends a confirmation message confirming that light source <b>110</b>A has accepted the address <b>127</b>. The master lighting device <b>110</b>, in response to the received confirmation message, associates address <b>127</b> with the lighting system <b>100</b> component for any future communication. In some embodiments, assignment mode entails the master receiving messages from one or more lighting system <b>100</b> components and assigning addresses <b>127</b> in response to the received messages.
0205In one example, a non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be utilized with associated lighting system <b>100</b> components for assignment of addresses <b>127</b>. In some embodiments, a master communicates with a plurality of lighting system <b>100</b> components which may or may not have a master status. One of the plurality of lighting system <b>100</b> components is a light source <b>110</b>A. In a number of embodiments, lighting system <b>100</b> components send information to the master using non-contact switch <b>400</b> associated with lighting system <b>100</b> components. A master may be placed in an assignment mode and may be available to receive any information from any one or more of lighting system <b>100</b> components. A user may select a light source <b>110</b>A by placing an object <b>450</b>, such as a hand, in front of a non-contact switch <b>400</b> associated with the light source <b>110</b>A. Light detector <b>420</b> of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>, in response to the placed object <b>450</b>, detects light emitted by LED <b>405</b> and non-contact switch <b>400</b> sends a signal indicating that the light source <b>110</b>A is selected. Light source <b>110</b>A transmits a signal to the master indicating the user's selection and the master assigns an address <b>127</b>, such as address <b>127</b>A, to light source <b>110</b>A. The master transmits information notifying light source <b>110</b>A of the new address <b>127</b> assigned to the light source <b>110</b>A. The light source <b>110</b>A uses the assigned address <b>127</b> to receive for communication with master or any other lighting system <b>100</b> component. In some embodiments, light source <b>110</b>A uses the assigned address <b>127</b> to recognize which information transmitted by any other lighting system <b>100</b> component is addressed to light source <b>110</b>A.
0206In a similar example, the user may proceed to select any number of lighting system <b>100</b> components by placing an object <b>450</b> in front of a non-contact switch <b>400</b> associated of each selected lighting system <b>100</b> component. The master, in response to user's selections via a non-contact switch <b>400</b>, may assign an address <b>127</b> to each of the user selected lighting <b>100</b> system components. Upon completing all the selections, the user may terminate the assignment mode and the master may store all the addresses <b>127</b> and lighting system <b>100</b> components associated with each of the addresses <b>127</b>. The lighting system <b>100</b> components may use addresses <b>127</b> assigned to transmit or receive information or communication among the lighting system <b>100</b> components assigned. In some embodiments, similar methods may be used to create a group of lighting system <b>100</b> components, or a group of light sources <b>100</b>. A user may configure the group by selecting via non-contact switch <b>400</b> the light sources <b>110</b> that are the members of the group. In further embodiments, non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be used to distinguish a group of light sources <b>110</b> from another group of light sources <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, each of the groups selected may be controlled separately by the lighting system <b>100</b>. Each lighting system <b>100</b> component may store an addresses <b>127</b> of the group or a zone. As the commands or instructions are received for the light sources <b>110</b> of the specific group, the address <b>127</b> may be used as a key to address the members of the specific group to perform a certain function without affecting light sources <b>110</b> of other groups. Such addresses may also be referred to as group identifiers. Non-contact switch <b>400</b> may be used in any combination with any other lighting system <b>100</b> component to select, set up or configure any number of lighting system <b>100</b> components.
0207Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5B</figref>, an embodiment of steps of a method for detecting an object is depicted. At step <b>505</b>, an LED of a device emits a signal. At step <b>510</b>, a first portion of the signal reflects off of a transparent cover towards a detector of the device and a second portion of the signal propagates through the transparent cover. At step <b>515</b>, a gain circuit maintains a predetermined operation of the detector. At step <b>520</b>, the detector determines that a reflected first portion of the signal is below a threshold of the detector. At step <b>525</b>, the second portion of the signal reflects off of an object outside of the device towards the detector of the device. At step <b>530</b>, the device determines that the object is present responsive to the detector determining that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector.
0208Further referring to step <b>505</b> of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5B</figref>, a LED of a device emits a signal. The signal emitted may be any signal, such has an electromagnetic signal. In some embodiments, the signal is an infrared signal or a radio signal. In further embodiments, the signal is a modulated signal comprising a carrier frequency between 20 and 60 kilohertz, such as 40 kilohertz for example. The carrier frequency may be a frequency of pulses of bursts of light emitted by the LED. The signal may further be amplitude, frequency, phase or pulse width modulated. In some embodiments, the signal may further be modulated in any additional way. In some embodiments, the signal comprises high components of the signal and low components of the signal. In some embodiments, high components of the signal correspond to pulses of light emitted from the LED. In further embodiments, low components of the signal correspond to durations of time when there are no pulses of the signal. In still further embodiments, low components of the signal correspond to durations of time where LED emits light having a lower intensity than the intensity of light emitted during the emission of high components of the signal. The high components of the signal may comprise or correspond to portions of the signal comprising voltage, current, power or intensity that is higher or larger than the voltage, current, power or intensity of the portions of the signal that are comprised by, or correspond to, the low components. The signal may comprise portions of the signal comprising any number of pulses such as 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90 or 100 pulses for example. In some embodiments, the portions of the signal comprise more than 100 pulses, such as 200, 500 or 1000 pulses. Each pulse may be a part of a period comprising high and low components. In some embodiments, a pulse may comprise any number of periods comprising high and low components. In further embodiments, a pulse comprises a high component and a duration of signal not having a pulse comprises a low component. The signal may be emitted within any conical angle from the LED, such as 180 degrees, for example. The signal may be emitted from within an enclosure of the device. The signal may comprise any type and form of communication comprising instructions, commands or data. The signal may comprise communication for any component of the lighting system <b>100</b>, such as for example a lighting device <b>100</b> or another non-contact switch <b>400</b>.
0209At step <b>510</b>, a transparent cover of the device reflects a first portion of the signal and allows a second portion of the signal to propagate through or transmit through the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the first portion is emitted by a first light source of the LED <b>405</b> and the second portion is emitted by a second light source of the LED <b>405</b>. In further embodiments, the first and the second portions are emitted by the same light source of the LED <b>405</b>. In other embodiments, the first and second portions of the signal are emitted by different light sources of the LED <b>405</b>. In still further embodiments, some portions of the first or second portions of the signal are emitted by multiple light sources of the LED <b>405</b>, which may be same or different light sources. In some embodiments, the signal may be reflected from components, such as enclosure of the device, led controller <b>410</b>, power supply <b>140</b>, light detector <b>420</b>, detector controller <b>425</b>, connections <b>105</b> or any other component of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In some embodiments, a first portion of the signal is reflected off of the transparent cover <b>460</b>. A portion of the first portion of the signal may be reflected towards a light detector, such as the light detector <b>420</b>. In some embodiments, the second portion of the signal propagates through the transparent cover and exit the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. The transparent cover may reflect a percentage of the signal, such as 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 percent and propagate the remainder of the signal.
0210At step <b>520</b>, a gain circuit maintains, monitors, controls or adjusts operation of the detector. Gain circuit may be gain circuit <b>470</b>. The detector may be light detector <b>420</b>. Gain circuit may maintain operation of the detector to ensure that the detector operates within a predetermined sensitivity range. In some embodiments, predetermined sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the detector that is below the threshold for detecting a presence of an object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, specific sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the light detected that is above the detection threshold for detecting a presence of an object <b>450</b>. In other embodiments, specific sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the light detected that includes a detection threshold for detecting a presence of an object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, specific sensitivity range may be an intensity or power range of the detector that is below the detection threshold for detecting of the presence of the object <b>450</b>. Gain circuit may maintain operation of the detector a specific percentage of the detection threshold intensity or power for detecting the presence of the object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, gain circuit maintains operation of the detector between below the detection threshold for detecting the object <b>450</b> by a predetermined percentage of the threshold. The predetermined percentage of the threshold may be any percentage of the intensity or power of light detected to meet or exceed the threshold for detecting of the object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, the predetermined percentage of the threshold may be between 0 and 5 percent, 5 and 10 percent, 10 and 20 percent, 20 and 30, 30 and 40 percent, 40 and 50, 50 and 60 percent, 60 and 70 percent, 70 and 80 percent, 80 and 90 percent, 90 and 95 percent, or 95 and 100 percent of the detection threshold. In some embodiments, the gain circuit determines that the signal or a portion of the signal detected by the detector is below the specific sensitivity range. The portion of the signal may be a duration of any number of pulses, such as between 1 and 10 pulses, 10 and 20 pulses, 20 and 30 pulses, 30 and 40 pulses, 40 and 50 pulses, 50 and 60 pulses, 60 and 80 pulses, 80 and 100 pulses, 100 and 200 pulses, 200 and 2000 pulses or any other number of pulses. In some embodiments, the gain circuit determines that a portion of the signal comprising any number of high components and low components is below the specific sensitivity range. The gain circuit may adjust or increase the gain to ensure that the detector detects the portion of the signal within the specific sensitivity range or within a specific percentage range of the detection threshold. Similarly, the gain circuit may determine that a portion of the signal comprising any number of high components and low components is above the specific sensitivity range. The gain circuit may adjust or decrease the gain to ensure that the detector detects the portion of the signal within the specific sensitivity range or within a specific percentage range of the detection threshold. Adjustment of gain may be done by varying pulse width of the signal. In some embodiments, adjustment of gain is implemented by increasing or decreasing a duration high components of each pulse. In further embodiments, adjustment is implemented by increasing or decreasing a duration of low components of each pulse. By adjusting the high component to low component duration ratio of the pulses of the signal the device may adjust the gain of the detector. Adjustment of gain may be done at a specific rate to allow the gain not to be adjusted fast enough in embodiments when object <b>450</b> approaches the device. In such instances, the object <b>450</b> may cause the portion of the signal detected to exceed the detection threshold of the detector faster than the gain circuit would adjust the gain of the signal.
0211At step <b>520</b>, the detector determines that a reflected first portion of the signal is below a threshold of the detector. The threshold of the detector may be a sufficient the power or intensity of signal detected by the detector to recognize the presence of the object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, the reflected first portion of the signal includes the portion of the signal reflected by the transparent cover <b>460</b>. In further embodiments, the reflected portion of the signal includes the portions of the signal reflected by any segment or component of the non-contact switch <b>400</b>. In still further embodiments, detector determines that the total signal reaching the detector is below the threshold, in response to actions, adjustments or maintaining of performance performed by the gain circuit.
0212At step <b>525</b>, the second portion of the signal reflects off of an object outside of the device. The second portion of the signal may comprise a portion of the signal that has propagated through the transparent cover. The second portion of the signal may comprise a portion of the signal that has propagated through the transparent cover and has reflected off of an object, such as an object <b>450</b>. In some embodiments, the second portion of the signal or a portion of the second portion of the signal reflects towards detector, such as the light detector <b>420</b>. In further embodiments, the second portion of the signal or a portion of the second portion of the signal reflects off the object and through the transparent cover towards the detector. The object may be a portion of a body of a person, such as a user, or any embodiment of the object <b>450</b>.
0213At step <b>530</b>, the device determines that the object is present responsive to the detector determining that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. In some embodiments, the detector determines that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. In some embodiments, the detector receives the reflected second portion of the signal reflected off of the object <b>450</b> in addition to the received first portion of the signal. The detector may detect the sum of the reflected first and second portions of the signal. In some embodiments, the detector detects average intensity or power of the reflected first and second portions of the signal. In further embodiments, the detector determines that the sum of the received first and second portions of the signal exceeds the threshold intensity or power needed for the detector to recognize the presence of the object <b>450</b>. In still further embodiments, the device determines that the object is present responsive to the determination of the detector that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the intensity or power threshold of the detector needed to detect the presence of the object. In still further embodiments, the determination that the object is present is responsive to the actions or adjustments by the gain circuit. In still further embodiments, the determination that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold is further based on the average intensity of the plurality of pulses of the reflected first and second portions of signal exceeding the threshold established by the gain circuit.
F. Systems and Methods for Assigning of Master and Slave Status
0214Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6A</figref>, an embodiment of a system for assigning of master or slave status to a light device <b>110</b> is illustrated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6A</figref> depicts lighting devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B exchanging communication signals via a connection <b>105</b>. Lighting device <b>110</b>A comprises controller <b>120</b>A, master/slave addressor <b>130</b>A and a communicator <b>125</b>A that further includes address <b>127</b>A and detector <b>605</b>A. Lighting device <b>110</b>B includes a controller <b>110</b>B that comprises communicator <b>125</b>B, address <b>127</b>B and master/slave addressor <b>123</b>B. The signals or communication transmitted between the lighting devices <b>110</b>A and <b>110</b>B include data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> and instruction bits <b>220</b> that are divided into time intervals or periods <b>205</b>. Data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> and instruction bits <b>220</b> within each period <b>205</b> define a duty cycle of each period <b>205</b>. The duty cycle of each period <b>205</b> may further define or identify power <b>655</b> or intensity <b>658</b> for the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> and instruction bits <b>220</b> of the signals may form instructions <b>650</b> for assigning master or slave status to the lighting devices <b>110</b>. The instructions <b>650</b> in addition to providing instructions for assigning status, such as a master or slave status, may also be included within the duty cycle that may also provide power <b>655</b> and/or intensity <b>658</b> for the lighting device <b>110</b>.
0215In further detail, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6A</figref> illustrates a detector <b>605</b> that receives, detects and identifies instructions <b>650</b>. Detector <b>605</b> may include any type and form of hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software. Detector <b>605</b> may include any type and form of a device, a unit, a structure, an apparatus, a function, an algorithm, a script, an executable file, a software application or a software program that operates on a computing device such as a lighting device with a processor. In some embodiments, detector <b>605</b> includes any type and form of a function, application, device, unit or a structure for receiving, detecting, identifying, managing or manipulating instructions <b>650</b>. Detector <b>605</b> may comprise any unit, function or a component for identifying or recognizing instructions <b>650</b> from any type and form of data <b>210</b>, such as data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. In some embodiments, detector <b>605</b> includes any type and form of a policy or a policy engine. In further embodiments, detector <b>605</b> includes a rule or a rule engine. The policy or policy engine or the rule or the rule engine may determine or identify actions to be taken in response to the instructions <b>650</b>. In further embodiments, detector <b>605</b> includes a parser that parses incoming data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> and instruction bits <b>220</b>. The parsed data may be used by any component of the lighting device <b>110</b> to implement or execute actions as defined by the received instructions <b>650</b>. In some embodiments, the parsed data is used to operate the lighting device <b>110</b> as identified by the power <b>655</b> or intensity <b>658</b>. In further embodiments, detector <b>605</b> determines the duty cycle within each of the time interval or period <b>205</b>. In still further embodiments, detector <b>605</b> determines the starting or ending point of each of the time intervals or periods <b>205</b>.
0216Power <b>650</b> may be any rate of delivery of electrical energy to a lighting device <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, power <b>650</b> is a product of voltage and current delivered to a lighting device <b>110</b>. The power <b>650</b> may be delivered to the lighting device <b>110</b> from another lighting device <b>110</b>, from a power supply <b>140</b> or from any power outlet or plug. In some embodiments, power <b>650</b> is defined by the duty cycle of a signal or communication received by the lighting device <b>110</b> via connection <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, power <b>650</b> within a period <b>205</b> is defined by a ratio of a duration of a period <b>205</b> for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire duration of the period <b>205</b>. In further embodiments, power <b>650</b> within a period <b>205</b> is defined by an average voltage, current or power value of the signal within the period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, power <b>650</b> may be defined by a signal that comprises a plurality of periods <b>205</b>. The lighting device <b>110</b> may emit light or otherwise operate in accordance with power <b>650</b>. The power <b>650</b> may change from period <b>205</b> to period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the power <b>650</b> may remain unchanged over any number of consecutive periods <b>205</b>, regardless if some periods <b>205</b> comprise one or more instructions <b>650</b>.
0217Intensity <b>658</b> may be any amount of electromagnetic radiation emitted or emanated or to be emitted or emanated from the lighting device <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> identifies an amount of photons of light emitted from the lighting device <b>110</b>. In further embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> is an amount of light emitted by lighting device <b>110</b> per a predetermined amount of time. In some embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> is defined by the duty cycle of a signal or communication received by the lighting device <b>110</b> via connection <b>105</b>. In some embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> within a period <b>205</b> is defined by a ratio of a duration of a period <b>205</b> for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire duration of the period <b>205</b>. In further embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> within a period <b>205</b> is defined by an average voltage, current or power value of the signal within the period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> may be defined by a signal that comprises a plurality of periods <b>205</b>. The lighting device <b>110</b> may emit light or otherwise operate in accordance with intensity <b>658</b>. The intensity <b>658</b> may change from period <b>205</b> to period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, intensity <b>658</b> may remain unchanged over any number of consecutive periods <b>205</b>, regardless if some periods <b>205</b> comprise one or more instructions <b>650</b>.
0218Instructions <b>650</b> may include any type and form of commands, instructions, or configurations, such as for assigning a status to a lighting device <b>110</b>. Instructions <b>650</b> may include data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. In some embodiment, instructions <b>650</b> includes any combination of data <b>220</b>, data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include any type and form or commands and instructions for assigning a status of a master or a slave to a lighting device <b>110</b>. The status of a master may enable the lighting device <b>110</b> to send out instructions or commands to one or more lighting devices on a network. The status of a master may further enable the lighting device to control, manage or modify operation, functionality or output of other lighting devices <b>110</b> connected to the lighting devices <b>110</b> via the connection <b>105</b>. The status of a slave may enable the lighting device <b>110</b> to receive instructions and commands from a lighting device <b>110</b> that is assigned a status of the master. The status of a slave may enable the lighting device to be controlled, managed or have its operation, functionality or output modified by the lighting device that is assigned a status of the master. The lighting device <b>110</b> assigned the status of a slave may be modified, commanded, operated or have its operation or functionality controlled or modified by the lighting device <b>110</b> having the status of the master by receiving instructions <b>650</b> via the connection <b>105</b>.
0219In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include messages used to diagnose problems of lighting devices <b>110</b>. Instructions <b>650</b> may include requests and responses to the requests and may be sent by master or slave lighting devices <b>650</b>, such as:
0000LC_ACK_ON_ALERTS sending an acknowledgement to check for an error, such as humidity, temperature or voltage error; <br /> LC_CLEAR_ALERTS clearing alert flags from the lighting device <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_SET_ALERT_HISTORY setting alert flag if permanent history exists. <br /> LC_DRIVE_LED_ALERT setting an alert light or alert LED if an alert is set; <br /> LC_DRIVE_LED_ADDRESS setting alert light to on when a match between an address <b>127</b> of a previously received instruction <b>650</b> and an address <b>127</b> of the lighting device <b>110</b> is detected; <br /> LC_NO_DRIVE_LED to set alert light to off; <br /> LC_ACK_ON_AMBIENT sending an acknowledgement if ambient light detector is active; <br /> LC_ACK_ON_PIR sending an acknowledgement if an object <b>450</b> is detected on a light switch enclosure.
0220In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include messages that include commands for controlling or managing of the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Instructions <b>650</b> may include dimming or brightness level instructions, color settings, flashing instructions, timing instructions, or any other control instructions, such as:
0000LC_SET_DIM commanding a setting of a dimming or a brightness value <br /> LC_SET_RED setting a value of brightness of red light; <br /> LC_SET_GREEN setting a value of brightness of green light; <br /> LC_SET_BLUE setting a value of brightness of blue light; <br /> LC_LATCH_RGB setting a value of brightness or intensity using a previous value for a specific zone or a specific group of lighting devices <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_LATCH_RGB_SHORT setting a value of brightness or intensity for all zones or all groups of lighting devices <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_MOVING_DOWN decreasing dim or brightness, intensity level; <br /> LC_MOVING_UP increasing dim or brightness, intensity level; <br /> LC_FOLLOW_DIM_LINE using external source for PWM signal to modify the dim or brightness and intensity level. Such external signal control may be cancelled with LC_SET_DIM instruction; <br /> LC_SELECT_LED1 selecting a lighting device <b>110</b><i>a </i>of the plurality of lighting devices <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_SELECT_LED2 selecting a lighting device <b>110</b><i>b </i>of the plurality of lighting devices <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_SELECT_LED3 selecting a lighting device <b>110</b><i>c </i>of the plurality of lighting devices <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_LATCH_FADE_SPEED using a previously sent value to set speed of fading light between 0% and 100%; <br /> LC_LATCH_MAX_LEVEL using a previously sent value as maximum dim or intensity, brightness level; <br /> LC_LATCH_SMOOTH_TIME using a previously sent value as dim number last sent as DIM transition time for “smooth DIM” <br /> LC_LATCH_ON_TIME using a value sent as a time interval during which the lighting device <b>110</b> will be turned on during the strobe or flashing effect; <br /> LC_LATCH_OFF_TIME using a value sent as a time interval during which the lighting device <b>110</b> will be turned off during the strobe or flashing effect; <br /> LC_START_FLASH starting a flashing or strobe effect by counting PWM pulses from the master lighting device <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_STOP_FLASH stopping the flashing or strobe effect.
0221In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include messages that set or check addresses of the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Instructions <b>650</b> may include any requests for address matches, setting of addresses, such as:
0000LC_ACK_ADDRESS requesting response from specific address. The address may include a number between 1 and 511. This instruction may send 0 to clear the addresses; <br /> LC_ENTER_LEARN_MODE turning on the learn mode or the addressing assignment mode and allowing the lighting devices <b>110</b> to learn set addresses, be assigned addresses or modify addresses; LC_CANCEL_LEARN_MODE ignoring learn mode and not saving the modified addresses; <br /> LC_EXIT_LEARN_MODE turning off the learn mode or the addressing assignment mode; <br /> LC_ACK_ZONE_MATCH sending acknowledgement if a one-wire zone or group of lighting devices <b>110</b> was recognized; <br /> LC_FLASH_ZONE_ID flashing a zone identifier; <br /> LC_RESET_ZONE setting the zone to default, such as value of 0 for example.
0222In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include messages that activate or deactivate light switch enclosure detection of an object <b>450</b>, such as:
0000LC_IR_TOUCH_SENSE commanding to use infrared, or IR, touch sensing; <br /> LC_IR_CODE_SENSE commanding to use IR receive code sensing; <br /> LC_PIR_SENSE commanding to use passive IR person sensing <br /> LC_KEY_FOB_SENSE commanding to use wireless key fob sensing <br /> LC_OTHER_SENSE commanding to use unlisted or an auxiliary technology for sensing <br /> LC_NO_SENSE commanding to turn off all sensing, and instead use the line communication between the lighting devices <b>110</b> only.
0223In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include messages that set or check for master or slave statuses of the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Instructions <b>650</b> may assign or verify master and slave statuses of the lighting devices using any number of commands, such as:
0000LC_ACK_MASTER sending a global request to all the lighting devices <b>110</b> to acknowledge a master status of a lighting device <b>110</b>. <br /> LC_ACK_GRANT_MASTER granting or assigning a master status to a lighting device <b>110</b> previously having a slave status; <br /> LC_ACK_DECODE_ERR sending an acknowledgement response stating that the instruction <b>650</b> to acknowledge a master status was not recognized; <br /> LC_CHECK_FOR_SLAVE sending a request to set a status of a lighting device <b>110</b> to slave status; <br /> LC_ACK_REQ_SHORT sending a default request to set a hardware to clear.
0224In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include messages that configure options, such as clock and timing of the lighting devices. Such instructions may grant or assign generic status or be used for control of communications, such as:
0000LC_POWER_ON_FULL powering on the lighting devices <b>110</b> to full 100% brightness or intensity; <br /> LC_POWER_ON_LAST remembering a previous setting for next power-on <br /> LC_SET_NUMBER setting current value to be used for intensity, addresses, status, commands or communication to any value between 0 and 1023. <br /> LC_LATCH_COUNT using a value previously sent as count for upload/download bytes in packet, time setting; <br /> LC_LATCH_CLOCK_TIME using a value previously sent for a time and date, such as years/days/hours/seconds of time; <br /> LC_SET_ACTION using a value previously sent to assign the date and time of the event; <br /> LC_RESET_HARDWARE resetting hardware of the lighting devices <b>110</b>; <br /> LC_RAW_DATA sending raw data, such as higher-level protocol for extended commands; <br /> LC_REQUEST_STATUS asking for configuration string.
0225Instructions <b>650</b> may include status responses for lighting devices <b>110</b> such as, 12″ V-Line “Gen2.1”, 18″ V-Line “Gen-2.1”, Touch V1, Aperion V2, TriLight V3, Lightlink 105 V3, LightLink 101 V3, Super LightLink, or any other lighting device <b>110</b>. The instructions <b>650</b> may further include current software version or revision. In some embodiments, instructions <b>650</b> include software interfaces used for communication, such as the line, DMX communication interface, differential serial communication line or a wireless connection. Instructions <b>650</b> may further include hardware features installed, such as InfraRed, or IR detect present, light switch enclosure <b>400</b> or PIR detect present, ambient light sensor present, fire sensor present, DMZ interface present or wireless radio present. Instructions <b>650</b> may further include input selections, such as: 0 to 10 volt input, 10 volt current source, MOM switch, DMX address, PWM signal input, inverted PWM signal input, preset switch input, IR touch or IR command line. Instructions <b>650</b> may further include a time, such as current time of day, total on duration of time, lighting device <b>110</b> on running time, and event timers. Instructions <b>650</b> may include humidity, temperature and voltage error readings, such as: humidity reading, minimum lifetime humidity reading with time stamp, maximum lifetime humidity reading with time stamp, temperature reading, minimum lifetime temperature reading with time stamp, maximum lifetime temperature reading with time stamp and over voltage detection with time stamp. Sometimes, instructions <b>650</b> may further include current status of sensors, such as: IR detect, PIR detect, PIR person detector tripped since last request, current state of ambient light sensor, and current state of the fire or smoke sensor.
0226Connection <b>105</b>, which may also be referred to as the line, may be any medium through which signals, communications, instructions, power and intensity are transmitted. In some embodiments, the line is a I2Systems Lightlink™ of I2Systems Inc. In further embodiments, the line is I2Systems or I2System Lightlink Control Bus, also referred to as LLCB by I2Systems Inc. The line may comprise a single active wire connection between two or more lighting devices <b>110</b> and a single ground return wire. Two or more lighting devices <b>110</b> may be connected via the line in parallel connection, in series connection or in any combination of parallel and series connections. In some embodiments, the lighting devices are connected in a parallel connection pattern in which the communication receiving pins of the lighting devices <b>110</b> are connected to the active wire of the line and ground pins of the lighting devices <b>110</b> are connected to the ground wire of the line. In some embodiments, the line includes a medium for controlling lighting devices <b>110</b> via a lighting dimmer scheme, such as a DMX-512 protocol for a DMX connection. In further embodiments, the line includes a RS-232 connection, a wireless connection or an Ethernet connection. In still further embodiments, the line is any medium supporting or handling any 8/16 bit digital communication.
0227In one embodiment, a master lighting device <b>110</b><i>a </i>communicates with a plurality of slave lighting devices <b>110</b> via the line. The line may include an active wire via which the communications are transmitted, and a ground return wire. Communications transmitted may include signals, instructions, request and response messages, power or intensity modulating signals, commands, configurations, settings, read-backs or any other type and form of transmissions The communications may be digital transmissions of any voltage or current characteristics or range. In some embodiments, digital pulse width modulated (PWM) signals based on a 5 volt digital logic are transmitted via the line. The PWM signals may use a 5 volt signal to indicate a high state, while a 0 volt transmission may indicate a low state. A threshold distinguishing between the high and the low levels may be any value between 0 and 5 volts, such as 2.5 volts for example. In some embodiments, the signal in addition to only two levels, a high level and a low level, may further include additional levels, such as a third level, a fourth level, a fifth level, and so on. The line may transmit communication using a half-duplex channel allowing a single lighting device <b>110</b><i>a </i>to send a communication at one time. The lighting devices <b>110</b> receiving the communication may send acknowledgement transmissions in response to the received communication. The acknowledgement may include a response that a received instruction <b>650</b> was implemented or an indication that the received communication was acknowledged. In some embodiments, acknowledgements include a response that an error occurred or that that the received instruction <b>650</b> was not acknowledged. For example, the master lighting device <b>110</b><i>a </i>may send an instruction <b>650</b> to set a first slave lighting device <b>110</b><i>b </i>as a master lighting device. In response to the received instruction <b>650</b>, the master lighting device <b>110</b><i>a </i>may receive acknowledgements from each of the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Once each of the lighting devices <b>110</b> has acknowledged affirmatively, the first slave lighting device <b>110</b><i>b </i>may be assigned a master status and all the remaining lighting devices <b>110</b>, including the master lighting device <b>110</b><i>a</i>, may be assigned a slave status. The first slave lighting device <b>110</b><i>b </i>is from that point on recognized as the master and may send any instructions <b>650</b> or commands to any of the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Thus, the group of lighting devices <b>110</b> in this embodiment only have a single master lighting device <b>110</b> at a given time.
0228Instructions and acknowledgements transmitted between the lighting devices <b>110</b> may be sent via the line using any communication, such as DMX communication that uses DMX-512 protocol. In some embodiments, the DMX communication may be used or modified to enable two-way communication between lighting devices <b>110</b> by using RS-232 connections to listen for incoming communication, such as instructions or acknowledgements. Instructions or commands may be of any bit length, such as 2 bits, 4 bits, 8 bits, 16 bits or 32 bits. In some embodiments, instructions include a command of 4 bits, 8 bits of data and 4 bit checksum. In further embodiments, an additional instruction may be used to check for activity over the line. The rate of the communication transmitted via the line may vary. In some embodiments, communication is transmitted via the line at a rate of 250 cps. In further embodiments, communication transmitted may be at speed of 500 cps or clocks per second, 1000 cps, 4000 cps, 16000 cps or any other rate.
0229Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6B</figref>, an embodiment of steps for a method for assigning a status to a lighting device over a single line or a connection used by the lighting device to communicate with one or more of other lighting devices is illustrated. At step <b>605</b>, a first lighting device receives via a line a signal comprising an instruction within a first duty cycle. At step <b>610</b>, a detector of the first lighting device detects the instruction. At step <b>615</b>, a master/slave addressor assigns a status identified by the instruction to the first lighting device. At step <b>620</b>, the first lighting device emits light identified by the first duty cycle. At step <b>625</b>, the first lighting device receives via the line a second signal comprising a second duty cycle. At step <b>630</b>, the detector detects that the second signal comprises no instruction and the first lighting device emits light identified by the second duty cycle.
0230At step <b>605</b>, a first lighting device, such as the lighting device <b>110</b>, receives via a line a signal comprising an instruction within a first duty cycle. The first lighting device may receive the signal via any line, such as a connection <b>105</b> for example. In some embodiments, the signal is transmitted to the first lighting device via a conducting wire. In further embodiments, the first lighting device receives the signal via a wireless link. In yet further embodiments, the first lighting device receives the signal in the form of an electromagnetic wireless transmission that can be of any bandwidth or spectral range. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device receives the signal via an optical fiber or via any type and form of a waveguide. The signal received may include any type and form of a communication or a transmission, such as digital, analog, optical, wireless, electromagnetic or electrical signal or transmission. The signal may be divided into any number of periods <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the signal is of a duration of a single period <b>205</b>. In other embodiments, the signal is of a duration of a plurality of periods <b>205</b>. The signal may include any number of instructions, such as the instructions <b>650</b>. In some embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction <b>650</b> to set or establish a status of the first lighting device. In further embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction or a command to set or establish a master status to the first lighting device. In other embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction or a command to establish a slave status to the first lighting device. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction or a command to set or establish an intermediary status to the first lighting device. The intermediary status may be a status different from the master status or the slave status. The intermediary status may enable the first lighting device to act or operate as a master to a first number of lighting devices and to act or operate as a slave to a second number of lighting devices. The first number of lighting devices and the second number of lighting devices may be connected to the first lighting device via the same line, such as a connection <b>105</b>. The instructions comprised by the signal may be included within the first duty cycle of the signal. The first duty cycle may be a duty cycle of a first period <b>205</b> of a plurality of periods <b>205</b> of the signal. The first duty cycle may be any fraction or a ratio of a duration of a period <b>205</b> for which the signal includes a high voltage value over the total duration of the period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, first duty cycle is a fraction or a ratio of a duration of a period <b>205</b> for which the signal includes a high current value over the total duration of the period <b>205</b>. In further embodiments, first duty cycle is a fraction or a ratio of a duration of a period <b>205</b> for which the signal includes a high power value over the total duration of the period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, duty cycle includes an average value of the signal averaged over the period <b>205</b>. The total duration of the period <b>205</b> may include portions of the signal having any number of values.
0231At step <b>610</b>, any component of the first lighting device detects the instruction. The instruction may be any instruction <b>650</b>. In some embodiments, detector <b>605</b> detects the instruction <b>650</b>. In further embodiments, communicator <b>125</b> detects the instruction <b>650</b>. In still further embodiments, controller <b>120</b> detects the instruction <b>650</b>. In yet further embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> detects the instruction <b>650</b>. The first lighting device may detect the instruction using any type and form of a detecting mechanism, apparatus, application or a device. In some embodiments, the first lighting device detects the instruction <b>650</b> using a detector that monitors the receiving signal detects the instruction <b>650</b> within the signal. In further embodiments, the first lighting device monitors the incoming signal for a specific signal profile in order to detect the instruction. The lighting device <b>110</b> may detect the instruction <b>650</b> by matching an address or an identifier comprised by the incoming instruction <b>650</b> to address <b>127</b> stored on the lighting device <b>110</b>. The address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b> may include any set of characters, numbers, symbols, data <b>210</b>, data bits <b>215</b> or instruction bits <b>220</b>. In some embodiments, the address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b> includes a set of data bits <b>215</b>, characters, numbers or symbols that that match data bits <b>215</b>, characters, numbers or symbols of the address <b>127</b> stored on the lighting device <b>110</b>. The first lighting device may detect the instruction <b>650</b> by parsing the received instruction into components, one of which may be an address comprised by the instruction <b>650</b>. The address or the identifier of the parsed instruction <b>650</b> may be matched to the address <b>127</b> of the first lighting device by the detector <b>605</b>. In some embodiments, detector <b>605</b> matches the address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b> to the address <b>127</b> of the lighting device using any type and form of a logic comparator, a policy or a rule. In further embodiments, the lighting device uses a policy engine to match an address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b> to the address <b>127</b> of the lighting device. In still further embodiments, the lighting device uses a rule engine to match an address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b> to the address <b>127</b> of the lighting device. In yet further embodiments, the lighting device <b>110</b> uses any combination of a comparator, a logic component a parser, a rule engine, a policy engine or any other matching or detecting unit to detect the instruction <b>650</b>. Detector <b>605</b> may further identify the type of instruction, such as an instruction <b>650</b> to assign a master status, a slave status or any other type of status to the first lighting device <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, the first lighting device <b>110</b> identifies the instruction to assign a master status to the first lighting device. In other embodiments, the first lighting device identifies the instruction to assign a slave status to the first lighting device. In further embodiments, the first lighting device identifies the instruction to assign any other status, such as an intermediary status, to the first lighting device.
0232At step <b>615</b>, a component of the first lighting device assigns a status to the first lighting device. The status may be assigned to the first lighting device <b>110</b> in response to the identification of the received instruction <b>650</b> by the detector <b>605</b>. The status may be assigned to the first lighting device <b>110</b> in response to the matching of the address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b>. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> of the first lighting device assigns the status to the first lighting device <b>110</b>. In other embodiments, any component of the lighting device <b>110</b> assigns the status to the first lighting device <b>110</b>. In further embodiments, the status assigned to the first lighting device <b>110</b> is identified by the instruction <b>650</b> received by the first lighting device <b>110</b>. The status may be assigned in response to the detection of the instruction <b>650</b>. In some embodiments, the status is assigned in response to the matching of the address or the identifier of the instruction <b>650</b> with the address <b>127</b> of the first lighting device <b>110</b>. In still further embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> modifies or edits configuration of the first lighting device <b>110</b> in accordance with the status identified by the instruction <b>650</b>. Master/slave addressor <b>130</b> may edit or modify settings or configuration of the first lighting device <b>110</b> to a specific configuration of the status identified by the instruction <b>650</b>. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device to the master configuration in response to the detection <b>650</b> of the instruction to set the first lighting device <b>110</b> to the status of the master. In further embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device <b>110</b> to the slave configuration in response to the detection of the instruction <b>650</b> to set the first lighting device <b>110</b> to the status of a slave. In yet further embodiments, master/slave addressor <b>130</b> edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device to the intermediary configuration in response to the detection of the instruction to set the first lighting device to the intermediary status. Modified configuration in response to the detection of the instruction <b>650</b> to set up or assign a master status to the first lighting device <b>110</b> may change operation of the first lighting device <b>110</b> to control or manage other lighting devices connected via the line. In some embodiments, modified configuration in response to the detection of the instruction <b>650</b> to assign or set up a slave status to the first lighting device <b>110</b> changes or modifies the operation of the first lighting device <b>110</b> to be controlled or managed by another lighting device <b>110</b> that is connected via the line, or the connection <b>105</b>, to the first lighting device <b>110</b>.
0233At step <b>620</b>, the first lighting device emits light identified by the first duty cycle. The first lighting device <b>110</b> may emit the light having the intensity <b>650</b> or the power <b>655</b> as defined by the first duty cycle or as defined by the signal within the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has intensity <b>658</b> that is identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that has intensity <b>658</b> that is identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles, such as the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has intensity <b>658</b> that is proportional to the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has intensity <b>658</b> that is proportional to the maximum intensity of light emitted by the first lighting device multiplied by the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> that is proportional to the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> that is proportional to the maximum power used by the first lighting device multiplied by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, the first lighting device <b>110</b> emits light that has pulse or intensity variation that is defined or identified by the first duty cycle or by a plurality of duty cycles such as the first duty cycle.
0234At step <b>625</b>, the first lighting device receives via the line a second signal comprising a second duty cycle. The second signal may be divided into any number of periods <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, the second signal is of a duration of a single period <b>205</b>. In other embodiments, the second signal is of a duration of a plurality of consecutive periods <b>205</b>. The first lighting device may receive via the line a second signal comprising any functionality or any feature of the signal received by the first lighting device in step <b>605</b>. In some embodiments, the second signal comprises a second duty cycle that is same as the first duty cycle or substantially similar to the first duty cycle. In other embodiments, the second duty cycle is different from the first duty cycle. The second duty cycle may include any embodiments and any functionality of any duty cycle. The second duty cycle may not include any instructions <b>650</b> but may still define or identify the same power <b>655</b> or the same intensity <b>658</b> as defined by the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the second duty cycle does not include any instructions <b>650</b> but still identifies or defines power <b>655</b> that is the same or substantially similar as the power <b>655</b> defined or identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, the second duty cycle does not include any instructions <b>650</b> but still identifies or defines power <b>655</b> that is the same or substantially similar as the power <b>655</b> defined or identified by the first duty cycle.
0235At step <b>630</b>, first lighting device detects that the second signal comprises no instructions and emits light identified by the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, detector <b>605</b> detects no instructions <b>650</b> within the second signal. The first lighting device may emit light identified by the second duty cycle. The first lighting device <b>110</b> may emit the light as identified by the second duty cycle regardless of the presence or absence of the instruction <b>650</b> from the signal within the second duty cycle. The first lighting device <b>110</b> may emit the light having the intensity <b>650</b> or the power <b>655</b> as defined by the second duty cycle or as defined by the signal within the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has intensity <b>658</b> that is proportional to the second duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has intensity <b>658</b> that is proportional to the maximum intensity of light emitted by the first lighting device multiplied by the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> identified by the second duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> that is proportional to the second duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power <b>655</b> that is proportional to the maximum power used by the first lighting device multiplied by the second duty cycle. In further embodiments, the first lighting device <b>110</b> emits light that has pulse or intensity variation that is defined or identified by the second duty cycle or by a plurality of duty cycles such as the second duty cycle.
G. Systems and Methods for Low Level Dimming
0236A lighting system deployed at a site may comprise any number of lighting devices and dimmers. A user of the lighting system may use a single dimmer circuit to dim any number of lighting devices. Normally, standard lighting systems experience problems when dimming of lighting devices approach low intensity levels, such as brightness levels below 5% of the maximum brightness of a device. When a user dims a light down to anywhere between 1% and 5% of the maximum brightness, the lighting devices begin flickering and emitting uneven intensities. Sometimes, intensity differences can be observed among the different lighting devices of the group.
0237The present system enables a single dimmer to dim one or more lighting devices to levels of between 1% and 5% of the maximum brightness without inducing flickering and uneven intensities of the light. The systems and techniques provided herein reduce background noises and fluctuations in the incoming signal to ensure that the lighting devices <b>110</b> operate at any intensity range without visible flickering or unevenness in the lighting output, including the operation at low level dimming ranges of 1%, 2%, 3%, 4% and 5% of the maximum brightness level.
0238Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref>, a system for implementing a controlled and consistent low level dimming is illustrated. In brief overview, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7A</figref> illustrates a dimmer <b>750</b> which may be used by a user to dim lighting devices <b>110</b>A-C as desired. Dimmer <b>750</b> is connected to an isolator <b>755</b> which may further be connected to dimming function <b>700</b>A that connects to a lighting device <b>110</b>A. Dimming function <b>700</b>B may not be using an input from an isolator <b>755</b>, but may rather be connected directly to the dimmer <b>750</b>. Dimming function <b>700</b>B may be connected to one or more lighting devices, such as lighting devices <b>100</b>B and <b>100</b>C. Dimming functions, such as the dimming function <b>700</b>A and <b>700</b>B, may each comprise an analog to digital converter, also referred to as A/D converter <b>705</b>, a processor <b>710</b>, an edge filter <b>715</b>, a truncator <b>720</b>, a delta function <b>725</b>, a hysteretic filter <b>730</b> and a smoothing filter <b>735</b>. Dimming functions <b>700</b> may monitor, process and modify the dimming signal from the dimmer <b>750</b> to ensure smooth, even and steady while reducing any flickering.
0239A single dimmer <b>750</b> may control any number of lighting devices and may interface with any number of dimming functions <b>700</b>. In some instances, dimmer <b>750</b> interfaces with some dimming functions <b>700</b> via isolators <b>755</b>, while in others, dimming functions <b>700</b> interface directly with the dimmer <b>750</b>. Dimmer <b>750</b> may transmit a digital control signal, such as a PWM signal to control dimming of lighting devices <b>100</b>. Isolators <b>755</b> may be used to protect a lighting device from any surging currents from other parts of the system. A dimming function <b>700</b> may receive an incoming PWM signal and determine a duty cycle of the PWM signal. In some embodiments, either isolator <b>755</b> or dimming function <b>700</b> may generate a separate analog or digital signal representing the duty cycle of the PWM signal. When needed, the dimming function may convert the incoming analog signal representing the PWM signal duty cycle into a digital representation or value using A/D converter <b>705</b>. The converted digital PWM duty cycle signal may have a predetermined number of bits. Edge filter <b>715</b> of the dimming function may check if the edges are being received indicating if the signal is dimmed or not. When the signal is dimmed, truncator <b>720</b> may truncate a portion of the signal most susceptible to noise and scale the remaining signal back to the original predetermined number of bits. As PWM data may be transmitted to the lighting device <b>110</b> continuously or periodically, delta function <b>725</b> may compare the changes between a previous PWM duty cycle value and the present or new duty cycle value. Delta function may use the processor <b>710</b> to calculate any differences between the new and previous changes in the PWM duty cycle. Based on the size of differences between the previous duty cycle and the present duty cycle, hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may determine whether a new PWM signal should be used to change the brightness or dimming of the lighting device <b>110</b>. Smoothing filter <b>735</b> may be used to instruct the lighting device <b>110</b> to increase or decrease its brightness gradually over a period of time.
0240Accordingly, a dimming function <b>700</b> may truncate a portion of a duty cycle signal prone to noise and rely only on the portion of the duty cycle signal that is not prone to noise to control the dimming of the lighting devices. Dimming function <b>700</b> may therefore map the truncated and noise-reduced digital signal to a set of digital values of the dimmer, thus making a previous 10% maximum brightness value be the new 0% (off) value, while the 11% value from the dimmer may map to a new 1% dimming value for the lighting device. As dimmer signal has less noise in 10%-15% range than in 0%-15% range, the dimming function may effectively operate in between 0% and 5% brightness range without having to deal with the noise that normally exists in the dimming PWM signal of that brightness range. Using these functions, the dimming function may intercept, process, filter and transmit the dimming signal intended for the lighting device before it reaches the lighting device <b>100</b> to ensure steady, smooth and flicker-free light emission of the lighting device.
0241Dimmer <b>750</b> may include any type and form of device, circuit or a function for modifying or controlling intensity of light emitted by a lighting device <b>110</b>. Dimmer <b>750</b> may comprise hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software. Dimmer <b>750</b> may comprise diodes, resistors, transistors, switches, analog to digital converters, processors and any other components which may be used for controlling brightness of light. Dimmer <b>750</b> may comprise the functionality for increasing or decreasing an root means square (RMS) voltage and mean power of signal to the lamp, such as a lighting device <b>110</b>. Dimmer <b>750</b> may include functionality for producing and/or modifying a digital signal. Dimmer <b>750</b> may transmit a digital signal to be used for controlling the brightness or intensity of lighting devices <b>110</b>. In some embodiments, dimmer <b>750</b> comprises any functionality for producing and transmitting a PWM signal for controlling and/or identifying intensity or brightness of light to be emitted by lighting devices <b>110</b>. Dimmer <b>750</b> may be a diac dimmer or a triac dimmer. Dimmer <b>750</b> may be any type and form of dimmer used for controlling the brightness output of a lighting device.
0242Isolator <b>755</b> may include any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for isolating a first portion of a lighting system <b>100</b> from a second portion of the lighting system <b>100</b>. Isolator <b>755</b> may include components, devices and/or functions for disabling currents or floating voltages from one part of the circuit of the system to be transmitted into another part of the circuit. Isolator <b>755</b> may comprise a circuit, logic or functions to electrically or electronically segregate one or more devices operating in one portion of a system from one or more devices operating in another portion of the system. Isolator <b>755</b> may comprise diodes, transistors, capacitors, inductors, opto-isolators, resistors, as well as processors, A/D converters, and any other set of components for implementing isolation of signals, currents or voltages. In some embodiments, isolator <b>755</b> comprises an optical isolation circuit that separates one part of the circuitry from another part of the circuitry. The isolation circuit may also include a power supply for powering up the circuit components when the incoming signal from the dimmer comprises an insufficient amount of voltage and/or current for powering up the isolation circuit. Isolator <b>755</b> may include functionality for processing the signal from the dimmer <b>750</b> and generating a signal to be transmitted to the dimming function <b>700</b> or lighting devices <b>110</b>. The signal transmitted may be a copy of the same signal as the signal from the dimmer <b>750</b> or a different signal derived from or generated using the signal from the dimmer. Isolator <b>755</b> may include functionality
0243Dimming function <b>700</b> may include any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for generating, modifying and/or controlling the signal used for implementing the dimming of lighting devices <b>110</b>. Dimming function <b>700</b> may include logic circuits, hardware components, processors, analog to digital converters, digital to analog converters, diodes, transistors, as well as algorithms, software components and functions for controlling the incoming PWM signal. Dimming function <b>700</b> may include any functionality for monitoring and modifying the signal from a dimmer <b>750</b> or an isolator <b>755</b> and generating and transmitting the modified signal to the lighting devices <b>110</b>. Dimming function <b>700</b> may include functions and algorithms to ensure that PWM signals to the lighting devices <b>110</b> are stable and noise free thus operating the lighting devices at very low intensities with stability and uniformity. Dimming function <b>700</b> may include any functionality for controlling, managing and modifying the PWM signal to the lighting devices <b>110</b> to ensure that each lighting device emits light at the same intensity as other lights of the group and without any flicker. The lighting devices may emit light at low level intensities, such as 5%, 4%, 3%, 2% or 1% of maximum brightness for each of the lighting devices.
0244A/D converter <b>705</b> may comprise any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for converting analog signal into a digital signal. A/D converter may also include functionality for converting a digital signal into an analog signal. A/D converter may comprise an 8-bit analog to digital converter, a 16-bit analog to digital converter, a 32-bit analog to digital converter, a 64-bit analog to digital converter or any other analog to digital converter used in the industry.
0245Processor <b>710</b> may comprise any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for processing a signal or data. Processor <b>710</b> may comprise logic functions, processing unit, computing unit, memory, memory cache, one or more registers or any other type and form of circuit that may be used for performing computer calculations or processing functions. Processor <b>710</b> may comprise functionality to process analog data or digital data. Processor <b>710</b> may include logic functions, circuitry, algorithms or devices for processing or calculating binary numbers or digital data. Processor <b>710</b> may comprise any functionality for performing any mathematical functions or processes, such as adding, subtracting, multiplying or dividing numbers. Processor <b>710</b> may also comprise functionality for performing mathematical functions on incoming signals, PWM data or any other information described herein.
0246Edge filter <b>715</b> may comprise any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for counting edges of bits or bits of data. Edge filter <b>715</b> may comprise functions, logic circuits, processors or counters for counting a number of high to low or low to high changes of a signal. Edge filter <b>715</b> may perform the counts within a predetermined time interval or based on an event. Edge filter <b>715</b> may comprise logic functions, circuitry, algorithms or devices for counting a number of PWM data bits received by the dimming function within a predetermined amount of time. Edge filter <b>715</b> may count the bits or data edges within any period of time, such as for example, within a time interval or period <b>205</b>. In some embodiments, edge filter <b>715</b> comprises functionality for checking a counter of for counting data bits every 5 milliseconds, 10 milliseconds or every 20 milliseconds.
0247Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for processing, truncating, scaling or remapping of incoming signal. Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise logic functions, algorithms, circuitry or devices for processing or modifying instructions, data, values or signal from a dimmer <b>750</b>. Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise functionality for truncating, or getting rid of, a portion of a digital signal, a digital value, an incoming digital number or an instruction. Truncator <b>720</b> may truncate a portion of a digital value to discard the value of the bits which may be representing noise. Truncator <b>720</b> may also comprise functionality for scaling the truncated digital signal to restore the truncated signal back to the number of bits it had before the truncation. Truncator <b>720</b> may further comprise functionality for remapping the truncated and scaled signal or data to a set of predetermined values or value ranges.
0248Truncator <b>720</b> may also comprise any functionality for truncating and scaling a digital signal. Truncator <b>720</b> may truncate or remove a lower portion of a digital signal, such as for example the bottom 10% of the bits of a binary value. Truncator <b>720</b> may truncate or remove an upper portion of a digital signal, such as for example the top 10% of bits of the binary value. Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise functionality to remove any portion or any range of bits of a binary value, such as top or bottom of 5%, 10%, 15%, 20% or any other range of the value. Once a portion of the signal is removed, truncator <b>720</b> may comprise functionality to scale the remaining portion of the signal value by multiplying it with a number in order to scale the digital value back up to the number of bits the value had before the truncation. For example, if a 16 bit signal was truncated by cutting out two top bits and two bottom bits, the remaining portion of the signal may be multiplied by a number to ensure that the result still comprises 16 bits even after the truncation. Truncator <b>720</b> may truncate, scale and/or remap any new set of PWM data or instructions as they arrive from the dimmer <b>750</b>.
0249Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise any functionality for remapping a truncated and scaled signal to a map having a particular set of values. Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise a map of values of normal dimming signal and truncated dimming signal. Truncator <b>720</b> may comprise functionality for mapping a value from of a truncated signal to a signal from a dimmer. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map a truncated digital signal representing 10% of maximum brightness value to a non-truncated digital signal representing 0% of maximum brightness value, and vice versa. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map a truncated digital signal representing 11% of maximum brightness value to a non-truncated digital signal representing 1% of maximum brightness value, and vice versa. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map a truncated digital signal representing 12% of maximum brightness value to a non-truncated digital signal representing 2% of maximum brightness value, and vice versa. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map a truncated digital signal representing 13% of maximum brightness value to a non-truncated digital signal representing 3% of maximum brightness value, and vice versa. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map a truncated digital signal representing 14% of maximum brightness value to a non-truncated digital signal representing 4% of maximum brightness value, and vice versa. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map a truncated digital signal representing 15% of maximum brightness value to a non-truncated digital signal representing 5% of maximum brightness value, and vice versa. Truncator <b>720</b> may include functionality to map any value of the truncated signal to any value of nontruncated signal using any mapping mathematical algorithms. The truncated and non-truncated values may be related via a linear or a non-linear mathematical function. In some embodiments, truncated and non-truncated values are not related and are independent from each other.
0250Delta function <b>725</b> may comprise any function or algorithm for comparing a present or new PWM duty cycle value to a previous PWM duty cycle value. Delta function <b>725</b> may include hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software. Delta function <b>725</b> may include logic circuitry, processors, functions or algorithms for comparing a present PWM duty cycle value to a previous PWM duty cycle value. Delta function <b>725</b> may comprise functionality for determining a delta comprising a numerical difference between the present or new PWM duty cycle value and a previous PWM duty cycle value. Delta function <b>725</b> may use a processor <b>710</b> to calculate the delta and compare the delta to a predetermined threshold. Delta function <b>725</b> may compare the delta of the new and old PWM duty cycle to a threshold value using the processor <b>710</b>. Delta function <b>725</b> may comprise instructions or code for instructing processor <b>710</b> to implement mathematical formulas to calculate the delta of the PWM duty cycle data signal. The PWM data signal outputted by the delta function <b>725</b> may comprise reduced noise from the PWM data signal coming into the dimming function <b>700</b> from the dimmer <b>750</b> or the isolator <b>755</b>.
0251Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may comprise any function or algorithm for determining whether or not to accept a new value of PWM duty cycle and for modifying the new PWM duty cycle value. Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may include hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software. Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may include logic circuitry, processors, functions or algorithms for performing calculations and making determinations based on threshold values. For example, hysteretic filter can include functionality for modifying, determining and processing the PWM data signal as well as the PWM duty cycle signal to be transmitted to the lighting devices <b>110</b>.
0252Smoothing filter <b>735</b> may comprise any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for generating and sending a gradually changing PWM signal or PWM duty cycle signal to the lighting device <b>110</b>. Smoothing filter <b>735</b> may comprise logic circuitry, processors, functions or algorithms for performing calculations and making determinations for transmitting PWM signal or PWM duty cycle that is smoothly or gradually changing over time. Smoothing filter <b>735</b> may comprise any functionality for transmitting PWM signal to the lighting device.
0253Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7B</figref>, another embodiment of a system and method for implementing low level dimming of a lighting device is illustrated. In brief overview, a dimmer <b>750</b> transmits a PWM instruction or data to an isolator <b>755</b>. The isolator <b>755</b> comprises a charge pump supply, a receive opto-isolator and a transmit opto-isolator, along with other resistors, diodes, transistors for processing the signals. Isolator <b>755</b> may process and forward the PWM signal from the dimmer <b>750</b>, herein expressed as the RX signal. Isolator <b>755</b> may use the RX signal to generate an analog duty cycle representation of the RX signal, such as the RX avg, or analog RX average signal. The RX average signal may represent the duty cycle of the PWM RX signal. In some embodiments, PWM duty cycle signal (the RX average signal) is a digital signal and is not converted into an analog signal. One of ordinary skill in the art will understand that should the PWM duty cycle signal be in the digital form a different type of processing may be used than the one disclosed for the analog signal.
0254Once the dimming function <b>700</b> receives the RX signal and the analog RX average signal, the A/D converter <b>705</b> may convert the analog RX average signal into a digital representation. If the RX average signal is already digitized, this step may be skipped. In some embodiments, dimming function <b>700</b> may generate the duty cycle average, or RX average, signal from the RX signal itself. Edge filter <b>715</b> of the dimming function <b>700</b> may count the edges of the PWM RX signal. Truncator <b>720</b> may truncate, scale and map the truncated RX digital signal to a new set of values. Delta function <b>725</b> may utilize the processor <b>710</b> to compare the value of the new RX average signal to the value of the previous RX average signal. Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may also utilize the processor <b>710</b> to perform mathematical calculations and implement algorithms that determine whether or not the new RX average signal should be used for the new PWM signal to the lighting device <b>110</b> or not. Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may compare a delta of the processed new PWM duty cycle and the previous PWM duty cycle signal to a predetermined threshold. Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may then perform a processing, multiplying or dividing of the new PWM duty cycle if the new delta exceeds a threshold. Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may update the value based on the mathematical calculations and determine the new PWM duty cycle to be used as the signal the lighting device <b>110</b>. Smoothing filter <b>735</b> may be used to gradually increase or decrease the signal to the lighting device <b>110</b> and avoid any abrupt changes to the light output.
0255In one embodiment of the systems and methods illustrated by <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7B</figref>, a dimming function <b>700</b> may receive a PWM signal (RX signal) as well as the duty cycle of the PWM signal. The duty cycle signal may be received in the form of an analog RX average signal. Dimming function may in some embodiments receive a digital PWM signal, such as the signal RX and calculate or determine the PWM duty cycle signal. The RX signal may comprise data or instructions for controlling the brightness of the lighting devices <b>110</b>. The analog RX average signal may be calculated as a PWM signal average within a time period. As RX average signal may also comprise a digital form, the PWM duty cycle may also be determined via any other methods, such as digital processing of the PWM RX signal, edge counting of the RX signal or by any technique for quantifying the duty cycle of the PWM RX signal. However, in the embodiment illustrated, the analog duty cycle (RX average) signal is filtered by a resistor and capacitor circuitry to produce an average level of the PWM (the duty cycle).
0256The RX average signal may be received by the A/D converter <b>705</b> of the dimming function <b>700</b> to produce an 8-bit result that is an unsigned number from 0 to 255. In some embodiment, the result may be any bit result, such as 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, 64 bits or 128 bits or any other digital bit size format.
0257Dimming function <b>700</b> may be connected to the isolator <b>755</b> as a one-wire or two-wire interface. The one-wire circuit may include an extra dimming wire without isolation that shares ground return with the power ground. The two-wire may include an isolated dimming that has its own isolated return. Regardless of the type of electrical connection, the digital RX PWM signal and the RX average signal may be generated and brought to the dimming function <b>700</b> as inputs.
0258Dimming function <b>700</b> may use the PWM RX signal for impulse filtering, while using the RX average signal for determining an intensity level. Both signals may be used together for accurate measurement. Edge filter <b>715</b> may monitor edges of the RX PWM signal. If edge filter <b>715</b> does not detect edges for a predetermined period of time, no calculations in further steps may be implemented. Accordingly, edge filter <b>715</b> may monitor the incoming RX stream for any edges to be detected. Should edge filter <b>715</b> not detect any edges, such as changes from high to low or low to high within a predetermined amount of time, the edge filter may determine that the device is either on or off, and not performing any dimming. However, should edge filter <b>715</b> detect any edges within a predetermined time interval, the edge filter may determine that the lighting device <b>110</b> is being dimmed. In such instances, dimming function <b>700</b> may determine that the signal is either completely on and not dimmed or completely off.
0259In one embodiment, edge filter <b>715</b> completes a reading of the incoming RX signal every 10 milliseconds. Should the edge filter not detect any edges transitions within 50 ms, then the edge filter may determine that the lighting device <b>110</b> is set on ON or OFF depending if the PWM wire is high or low. In some embodiments, if the edge filter had not detect any edge transitions within the previous 50 ms period, then there may needs to be consistent edges for more than 50 ms before the algorithm assumes that there is a valid PWM signal being received. Edge filter <b>715</b> may determine that signal is present within a 50 ms period by checking for edge transitions every 10 ms. Edge filter <b>715</b> may allow a change of state only if a counter counts to 5 while consistently either seeing edges or not seeing edges. As such, the edge filter <b>715</b> may make determinations not only in blocks of time of every 50 ms, but rather in rolling 10 ms periods, thus enabling a quicker response. As 10 ms is the period representing 100 Hz, which is considered the lowest frequency of PWM that will prevent flicker to the human eye, edge filter may operate on the period of 10 milliseconds or any period of time smaller than 10 milliseconds, such as 9 ms, 8 ms, 7 ms, 6 ms, 5 ms, 3 ms, 1 ms, 500 microseconds, 200 microseconds or 100 microseconds.
0260Once the analog RX average signal has been converted into a digital signal via A/D converter <b>705</b>, truncator <b>720</b> may begin processing the signal. The truncating, scaling and remapping of the signal by the truncator <b>720</b> may involve removing an offset, such as for example the bottom 10% of the signal and multiplying what remains by a number greater than ‘1’. The input may thereby be scaled or stretched to magnify an inner region of the signal, which may be less susceptible to noise due to lower level signal being transmitted.
0261Truncator <b>720</b> may truncate and scale the signal using any type and form of mathematical function. In the present example, should the A/D converter <b>705</b> be an 8-bit analog to digital converter, then the truncating and scaling process may involve the math, such as:
0262DIM_level=(DIM_level−26)*1.25, in which ‘26’ may represent a 10% of 255 (which represents the maximum signal via unsigned range of 0 to 255). The scaling factor of 1.25 may represents the increasing of the truncated result by 25% in order to scale the truncated signal back to the same number of bits which the signal had before the truncation. Depending on the number of bits of the analog to digital conversion, the scaling factor may use a more precise number, such as 1.222 instead of 1.25. For the number of bits, a more precise number may more accurately approximate the 10% scaling.
0263While one of the ordinary skill in the art understands that other mathematical formulas may be used for truncating and scaling, the scaling math may be completed to ensure that the scaled result does not exceed its range (in this case lower than ‘0’ and higher than ‘255’). The calculated result may have the input truncated at the low end by 10%. In some embodiments, the high end of the signal may also be truncated by 10%. In such instances, the scaling may be implemented to magnifying the range from 10% to 90% and therefore making these end values the new 0% and 100% of the signal. In such instances, the scaling factor may be selected such to compensate for the values thrown away and replace these values with the scaled portion of the signal. Truncator <b>720</b> may eliminate the highest and lowest duty cycle ranges of the PWM signal which may be the most noisy portions of the signal. These noisy ends of the PWM signal may often be caused by wire inductance and capacitance and other effects. Truncating and scaling these portions of the signal effectively reduces the noise in the PWM signal.
0264Delta function <b>725</b> may then determine a change between the new PWM duty cycle and a previous PWM duty cycle. In some embodiments, delta function may perform a mathematical calculation, such as:
0265delta=result−previous_result, in which the delta is calculated as the new truncated and scaled PWM duty cycle (result) minus the previous truncated and scaled PWM duty cycle (previous_result). The difference between the current reading and the previous result of the calculations may then be used to compare against a threshold.
0266Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may be used to for threshold comparison of the determined delta and for scaling the result based on the size of the delta. The hysteretic filter implement a function, such as:
0267if absolute value (delta)<32, then delta=delta/2.
0268This function may determine if the absolute value of delta is smaller than a predetermined threshold value, such as value of 32. In some embodiments, the predetermined threshold value may be any value, such as 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56 or 64 and may be scaled based on the bit size of the PWM signal. Should the value of the determined delta be smaller than the threshold value, then delta may be divided by two. In some embodiments, delta may be divided by any number, such as 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 10, 20 or any other number that may be used for dividing the signal. Scaling down or dividing the PWM duty cycle signal whose delta is smaller than a threshold ensures that small changes are biased against, thus filtering out any noise-like PWM behavior and ensuring steady lighting device operation. In the present embodiment, as the delta that is smaller than a threshold is divided by 2, the changes in the PWM duty cycle that are smaller than the threshold are made half as important.
0269Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may also perform further determinations to ensure the stability of the signal. In some embodiments, should the delta determined above be a negative number, the new PWM signal is accepted as the valid new PWM signal and is sent to the smoothing filter <b>735</b> to transmit to the lighting device <b>110</b>.
0270Hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may also determine if a signal should be ignored and discarded. To determine if the new PWM signal is to be ignored and discarded the hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may implement a function, such as:
0271if result<=previous_result+8, then discard. This function may determine that if the new truncated and scaled PWM duty cycle (result) is larger than the previous result by a count of 8 or less, then the new PWM signal is discarded and not used. Similarly, should the result be greater than the previous PWM duty cycle plus the count of 8, then the new PWM signal is accepted as valid and may be sent to the smoothing filter <b>735</b> for transmission to the lighting device <b>110</b>. Using these functions, the hysteretic filter may operate with a bias to favor the low values of the PWM duty cycle signal and not allow any sudden, noise-like PWM changes to cause the flicker of the lighting device <b>110</b>.
0272Smoothing filter <b>735</b> may then be used to provide gradual transitions in the new PWM signal to the lighting device, thus reducing any sudden changes or flickers in the brightness of the light. Smoothing filter may operate using a series of functions, such as:
0273summation=(summation*15/16), which may be used to reduce the variable summation and make space for a new reading.
0274summation=summation+result, which may be used to add the new accepted PWM duty cycle to the previous value.
0275result=summation/16, which may be used to divide the result by the number of readings collected (calculate an average), thus smoothing the result being transmitted to the lighting device.
0276previous_result=result, may be used to save the new PWM duty cycle as the previous PWM duty cycle to be used when evaluating and calculating the next PWM duty cycle signal.
0277Using these functions, the smoothing filter <b>735</b> may act as an averaging filter to slow down transitions in PWM duty cycle signals fed to the lighting device. In some embodiments, the smoothing filter <b>735</b> may perform the functions using a mathematical algorithm, such as:
0278result=((summation*15/16)+new_reading)/16, which may be used in instances in which the number of results summed is 16 values. While the present algorithm uses a count of 16, other similar algorithms may be used to make the result transmitted to the light faster or slower.
0279Using these techniques, the edge filter in combination with the truncator <b>720</b>, delta function <b>725</b> and hysteretic filter <b>730</b> may act as both an impulse noise filter and as a fault tolerant PWM detector. In some embodiments, if the incoming level is low, there may be up to 4 of 10 ms periods in a row of noise transitions on the wire that may be ignored by the dimming function <b>700</b> and not considered valid PWM signal. This is the “impulse noise filter” function. Similarly, if there are small PWM values that are hard to recognize using other methods, the algorithm will tolerate up to 4 missing PWM periods to still be considered valid PWM. This is the “fault tolerant PWM detector” function.
0280Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7C</figref>, an embodiment of a system for using a multi-variable mapping function or equation to map one or more inputs to one or more outputs via an interface device is depicted. In brief overview, the system includes an interface device <b>702</b> comprising a processor for executing a multi-variable function <b>700</b>, such as any embodiments of the dimming function described herein. The interface device includes memory or access to memory for storing data. The interface is connected to or electrically coupled to a regulator <b>770</b> driving one or more lighting sources <b>100</b>, such as LEDs. The regulator may connected or coupled to a power source <b>140</b>. Likewise, the interface device may receive power or voltage from a power source <b>140</b>. The interface may receive multiple input signals, such as from a temperature sensor <b>760</b>, an area sensor <b>765</b>, a dimmer <b>750</b>, such as via a dimming button and dimming input signal, and a clock. The interface may received one or more input signals, process the input signals via the multi-variable function <b>700</b> to produce one or more outputs, such as an output to the regulator <b>770</b>.
0281The interface device may comprise any type of form factor. In some embodiments, the interface device may be a black box type device or unit. The interface device may comprise any one of the following: a controller, a chip, a component for a printed circuit board, a switch of the lighting device or a triac dimmer. The interface device may be part of or included in a lighting source. The interface device may be part of or included in any type and form of dimmer, such as a Triac dimmer. The interface device may be part of or included in any type and form of switch for a lighting source. The interface device may be part of or included in any type and form of thermal management component, such as an active thermal management component or sensor for a lighting source or fixture. In some embodiments, the interface device and/or any supporting components (included any inputs) may be installed onto a printed circuit board that also includes LEDs and/or LED fixture. In some embodiments, the interface device may be a stand alone module, component, product or chip. Such an interface device may be installed on a third party printed circuit board, fixture or controller.
0282The interface device may comprise any embodiments and components of the dimming functions <b>700</b> described in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 7A and 7B</figref>, including but not limited to an A/D converter, processor, edge filter, truncator, delta function, hysteric filter and smoothing filter.
0283The interface device may comprise a processor or a microprocessor loaded with firmware or executable instructions that include and perform the multi-variable equation/function <b>700</b>. The interface device may include any type and form of executable instructions designed and constructed to execute or perform any of the embodiments of the dimming function or multi-variable equation described herein. The interface device may be configured or constructed with one or more inputs and one or more outputs. The interface device may calculate output(d) from data available from the inputs and/or saved data in memory and processed through the multi-variable function <b>700</b>. The regulator may receive the output and adjusts the intensity levels to the lighting source based on the level set by the output from the interface device.
0284The interface device may be designed and constructed to receive one or more input signals. The interface device may be designed and constructed to receive analog signals. The interface device may be designed and constructed to receive digital signals. The interface device may be designed and constructed to receive one or more analog signals and one or more digital signals. Any of the input signals to the interface device may use any of the signaling and digital patterning, referred to as one-wire, described in Section D herein. Any of the output signals may use any of the signaling and digital patterning, referred to as one-wire, described in Section D herein
0285The interface device may be designed and constructed to receive input signals from any type and form of sensor. In some embodiments, the interface device may connect to, include or otherwise receive input from any type and form of temperature sensor. The temperature sensor may be installed within the interface device, adjacent to, or remotely to the interface device. The temperature sensor may be a diode. The temperature sensor may be designed and constructed to obtain temperature readings on an LED, light source, LED/light fixture or ambient temperature around the same. In some embodiments, the interface devices may connect to, include or otherwise receive input from any type and form of area sensor. An area sensor be any sensor that measures the physical environment including but not limited to a camera, light sensor, color sensor and motion sensor. The interface device may have a plurality of temperature and area sensors.
0286The interface device may be designed and constructed to receive input signals from a dimmer <b>750</b>. In some embodiments, the interface device may be connect to, include or otherwise receive input from a dimming button. The dimming button may be installed in, adjacent to or remotely from the interface unit. The dimming button may be a physical switch or potentiometer. In some embodiments, the dimming button may be responsive to touch or may use a non-contact mode of switching. In some embodiments, the interface device may be connect to, include or otherwise receive input from a dimming input. The dimming input may be a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal. The dimming input may be a TRIAC dimming signal (thus the input waveform is the same as incoming on the power lines to the fixture), or any other type of dimming including the standard protocols of DMX, DALI, and 0-to-10V control. The dimming input may be wireless and use a wireless protocol. The dimming input may use any of the signaling and digital patterning, referred to as one-wire, described in Section D herein.
0287The interface device may receive voltage via a power source to power the interface device. The interface device may also read and/or monitor the voltage as an input. In some embodiments, the interface device may know at if voltage is applied and at what voltage level. The voltage level may be used as an input signal to the multi-variable function.
0288The interface device may include an internal or external regulator <b>770</b>. The regulator may be a voltage regulator. The regulator may be a voltage stabilizer. The regulator may be an electromechanical regulator. The regulator may be a voltage transformer. The regulator may be a switching regulator. The regulator may be a linear regulator. The regulator may be a transistor based regulator. The regulator may be an op amp based regulator. The regulator may be an active regulator. The regulator may be a hybrid or combination regulator.
0289The interface device may include any type and form of internal or external clock. The clock may be onboard, adjacent to or remote from the interface time. The clock keeps track of time. The clock may provide an input signal to or for the interface device, which may used as a variable in the multi-variable function.
0290The interface device may include any type and form of internal or external memory. The memory may be onboard, adjacent to or remote from the interface device. The interface device may store to memory data or information such as previous settings and history of the interface device. The interface device may obtain from memory any such data or information and use as variables (s) in the multi-variable function.
0291The interface device may include an interface for a user to configure the interface device. The interface can be any type and form of communications link. The interface device may receive digital commands via any of the digital signaling described in Section D herein.
0292In general overview, the multi-variable equation/function may comprise logic, functions, operations or executable instructions of the interface device that generate an output. The multi-variable equation/function calculate the output as levels as specified in the levels from any input signal. The multi-variable equation/function may incorporate hysteresis or past data such as that stored in the memory. The multi-variable equation/function may incorporate or use any one or more of the input signals to change the output. Any of the input signals may comprise a weight, factor or multiplier that changes the level of output based on the level of input and these input signals.
0293In some embodiments, the multi-variable equation/function determines an output level as function, scaling or mapping of any one or more inputs and the input level, such as any of the following example equations:
0000<br />Output=<i>Fn</i>1(input 1,input 2, . . . input <i>N</i>)
0000<br />Output=<i>fn</i>1(input1)+<i>fn</i>2(input2)+<i>fnN</i>(input<i>N</i>)
0000<br />Output=scaling factor for input*input level
0000<br />Output=(scaling factor for input 1*input level)*(scaling factor for input <i>N</i>)
0000Any of the scaling factors or functions may be configurable via the interface to the interface device. Any of the scaling factors or functions may be dynamically determined responsive to input, such as temp sensors, area sensors, clock, voltage, dimming input or button. Any of the scaling factors or functions may be based on historical data or hysteresis.
0294The multi-variable equation/function may generate a plurality of outputs. Any one of the outputs may be analog and/or digital. The output signal may be in the form of a PWM signal. The output signal may be in the form of a logic level signal. The output signal may be in the form of a serial stream. In some embodiments, multiple outputs may be used for color mixing applications. In these embodiments, each output of the multiple outputs may be used to drive or provided an output level for a corresponding color light source.
0295Single or multiple tasks may be executed concurrently via the multi-variable equation. The multi-variable equation may generate one or more outputs via a first task or calculation and then generate another one or more outputs via a second task or calculation. The second task or calculation may use different input(s) than the first task or calculation. The second task or calculation may use the same input(s) than the first task or calculation. The second task or calculation may use different weightings for the same or different input(s) than the first task or calculation. The second task or calculation may run or execute subsequent to the first take or calculation. The second task or calculation may run or execute concurrently or parallel to the first task or calculation. For example, light output be dimmed to 50% level while a temperature reading from the temperature sensor further dims the light an additional 10%. This may be seamless to any user.
0296In some embodiments, the multiple-variable equation generated output may used to manipulate or control the regulator may from their brightest levels to levels, such as LED levels, less than one tenth their rated value (e.g., dim a 10% chip to 1% intensity) while not using PWM signal. A timing circuit generates a ramp signal (e.g., triangle wave). The ramp waveform is applied to a current adjust input such that the level of the ramp represents change to the current output of the regulator. The frequency of the ramp may be configured, specified or established to be faster than the human eye can detect. The average current of the regulator may be adjusted by changing the level of the ramp. At high current output levels, the ramp is a constant high voltage. At low levels, the bottom of the ramp signal is low enough to drive the regulator to below its minimum state and the top of the ramp signal drives the regulator higher than the minimum state. When the level is above the minimum state, the regulator can operate. The actual current is the average of the current above minimum and below minimum levels, with a practical limit of one-tenth the minimum level.
0297The systems and methods described herein may be used in a variety of different applications. For example, in one example application, the interface device may be used for a manual relamping adjustments. In some embodiments, a user may select a button, such as an input button to the interface device to reset maximum intensity levels for relamping, such as to match surrounding lamps or for new installations to reset max level appropriate for the install. In another example application, the interface device may be used for an automatic relamping adjustment. In these embodiments, fixture wear may be calculated based on other local fixtures averaging their vintage, run time, operating temperature, and other variables and then the interface device may automatically calculate the intensity level of the new fixture.
0298In another example application, the interface device may be used for any motion and proximity sensing applications to change the level of output based on information and signals from area sensors. Changes in motion or presence may be used to calculate the output signal. Detection of predetermined colors may change the level of output. In another example application, the interface device may be used in retail branding and brand recognition applications. The interface device may use color sensors to sense the color of any products in displays and to change the level of output, such as color output, based on such sensing.
0299Referring now to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7D</figref>, embodiments of steps of a method for using a multi-variable mapping function or equation to map one or more inputs to one or more outputs via an interface device is depicted. In brief overview, at step <b>780</b>, the interface device receives one or more input signals, such an input signal providing a first level of output and/or sensor information. At step <b>782</b>, the interface device identifies for the input signal a digital value with a predetermined number of bits and generates a truncated digital value, such as by removing bits. At step <b>784</b>, the interface device maps the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value with the predetermined number of bits and to present a second level of output. The mapping may be determined responsive to sensor information, stored data, etc. At step <b>786</b>, the interface device may generate and transmit an output signal from the mapped non-truncated digital value. The output signal may be transmitted as an input signal to a lighting device.
0300At step <b>780</b>, the interface device may receive one or more input signals. An input signal may provide or represent a level of brightness or output for a lighting source, such as an LED. The interface device may receive an analog signal. The interface device may receive a digital signal. The interface device may receive the input signal via one of the following types of signals: pulse width modulation signal, a one-wire signal, a dimming protocol signal, and a wireless protocol. The interface device may receive one or more of the following input signals: a clock, a voltage, data from memory, temperature sensor signal, area sensor signal, dimmer button signal and dimmer input signal. The interface device may read, access or obtain data and information stored in memory as used as input, such as any historical data, performance or operational data of the interface device, including any variables or inputs previously used in any instance of the multi-variable function <b>700</b>.
0301The interface device may determine that an input signal, such as level of brightness, is dimmed. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that an input signal is from a dimmer <b>750</b>. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that an input signal is from a dimming button. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that an input signal is from a dimming input. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that the signal is dimmed by detecting that there is a change in the level of input signal. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that the signal is dimmed by detecting that there is predetermined amount of change in the level of input signal. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that the signal is dimmed by detecting that a change in the level of input signal exceeds a predetermined threshold. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that the signal is dimmed by detecting a change in the level of input signal over or for a predetermined time period. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that the signal is dimmed by detecting a delta, such as between a delta filter/function, between duty cycles and determine the delta is greater than a predetermined threshold. In some embodiments, the interface device may determine that the signal is dimmed by detecting changes in edges of the signal such as via an edge filter. The interface device, such as via edge filter, may operate at a frequency to prevent flicker to the human eye (e.g., frequency is set to avoid detection by human eye).
0302At step <b>782</b>, the interface device identifies for the input signal a digital value with a predetermined number of bits and generates a truncated digital value, such as by removing bits. The interface device may perform step <b>782</b> responsive to determining that the signal is dimmed. In some embodiments, the interface device converts the analog input value to a digital value, such as via an 8-bit analog to digital converter. The interface device may scale or convert the digital value from one number of bits into a second number of bits. In some embodiments, the interface device converts a digital analog signal into a value having a predetermined number of bits (e.g., 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, etc). The digital value may be scaled or remapped. The interface device may scale or remap the digital value responsive to any input signal and based on any weighting to such signals. A truncator of the interface device may scale or stretch the input may thereby be scaled or stretched to magnify an inner region of the signal, which may be less susceptible to noise due to lower level signal being transmitted. A truncator of the interface device may scale and/or remap the signal by removing an offset, such as for example the bottom 10% of the signal and multiplying what remains by a number greater than ‘1’. binary value. Truncator may remove any portion or any range of bits of a binary value, such as top or bottom of 5%, 10%, 15%, 20% or any other range of the value. Depending on the number of bits of the analog to digital conversion, the scaling factor may use more precision.
0303At step <b>784</b>, the interface device maps the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value with the predetermined number of bits and to present a second level of output. The interface device may perform step <b>788</b> responsive to determining that the signal is dimmed. The mapping may be determined responsive to sensor information, stored data, etc. The interface device may convert the truncated, mapped or scaled digital value back into a digital value having the same number of predetermined bits as in step <b>782</b>. In some embodiments, the interface device may convert the truncated digital value into a digital value having a second and/or different number of predetermined bits. Truncator may scale the truncated signal value by multiplying it with a number in order to scale the digital value back up to the number of bits the value had before the truncation. For example, if a 16 bit signal was truncated by cutting out two top bits and two bottom bits, the remaining portion of the signal may be multiplied by a number to ensure that the result still comprises 16 bits even after the truncation. The interface device may use any of the hysteric filter functions and/or smoothing filter functions to process the digital value.
0304The interface device may map or scale the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on any one or more inputs and/or any combination of inputs. The interface device map or scale the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on a temperature reading from a temperature sensor. A temperature reading may change the mapping or scaling by a predetermined value, percentage, scale or factor. For example, for temperature reading reaching a predetermined threshold, the interface device may change the output level by a predetermined value, percentage, scale or factor. In some embodiments, the temperature reading provides a temperature (ambient, surface or otherwise) of the LED, light source or light fixture. Based on changes in these temperature readings, the interface device may change the output level in a corresponding or predetermined manner.
0305The interface device may map or scale the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on a sensor reading from an area sensor. A sensor reading may change the mapping or scaling by a predetermined value, percentage, scale or factor. For example, for a sensor reading indicating an event, the interface device may change the output level by a predetermined value, percentage, scale or factor. In some embodiments, the sensor reading is a reading of an event or change in the physical environment of the interface device. Based on changes in these physical environment readings, the interface device may change the output level in a corresponding or predetermined manner.
0306The interface device may map or scale the truncated digital value to the non-truncated digital value based on data stored in memory. Based on input signal or variable data (including historical), the interface device may change the output level in a corresponding or predetermined manner. The interface device may determine or compute any metric or statistic on historical data, such as operational and performance data of the interface device and may change the output level in a corresponding or predetermined manner.
0307Steps <b>782</b> and <b>784</b> are embodiments of the multi-variable equation or dimming function <b>700</b> described herein. Although at times generally described with these embodiments, the multi-variable equation may use any of the input signals and a level of received input for the lighting device and map, scale, convert or change the level of input to output a second level of input to be transmitted or provided as the input level to a lighting source. In some embodiments, the multi-variable or dimming function <b>700</b> of the interface device takes the plurality of inputs and maps, scales, transforms the input level of brightness to an output level of brightness for a lighting device.
0308The generated output or determined second level of input may be based on any weighting of the input signals to be applied to the dimming function <b>700</b>. Any of the input signals (e.g., clock, voltage, dimmer button, dimmer input, temp sensor, area sensor) may change the number of predetermined bits for the digital value. Any of the input signals (e.g., clock, voltage, dimmer button, dimmer input, temp sensor, area sensor) may change the number of bits for truncation. any of the input signals (e.g., clock, voltage, dimmer button, dimmer input, temp sensor, area sensor) may change which bits to truncate. Any of the input signals (e.g., clock, voltage, dimmer button, dimmer input, temp sensor, area sensor) may change the amount of scaling of the truncated digital value to a non-truncated digital value. By way of a non-limiting example, any of the input signals (e.g., clock, voltage, dimmer button, dimmer input, temp sensor, area sensor) may change the values used in any of the following equations or functions of the dimming function described herein:
0000<br /><i>DIM</i>_level=(<i>DIM</i>_level−26)*1.25
0000<br />delta=result−previous_result,
0000<br />if absolute value(delta)<32,then delta=delta/2.
0000<br />if result<=previous_result+8,then discard
0000<br />summation=(summation*15/16),
0000<br />summation=summation+result
0000<br />result=summation/16
0000<br />result=((summation*15/16)+new_reading)/16
0000Any of the input signals (e.g., clock, voltage, dimmer button, dimmer input, temp sensor, area sensor) to the interface device may add or change a factor, value or variable to any portion of the dimming function <b>700</b>.
0309At step <b>786</b>, the interface device may generate and transmit or otherwise provide an output signal from the mapped non-truncated digital value. The interface device may generate and provide a digital output signal. The interface device may generate and provide an analog output signal. The interface device may generate and provide/transmit a plurality of output signals, which may be analog and/or digital. The interface device may provide or transmit the non-truncated digital value via one of the following types of output signals: pulse width modulation signal, logic level signal, a serial stream and a ramp signal. The interface device may transmit or otherwise provide the generated non-truncated digital value to a regulator that adjusts an intensity level to an LED or LED driver based on a level set by the non-truncated digital value.
Contents6
16 sheets
Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 3 Sheet 4 Sheet 5 Sheet 6 Sheet 7 Sheet 8 Sheet 9 Sheet 10 Sheet 11 Sheet 12 Sheet 13 Sheet 14 Sheet 15 Sheet 16
Every citation, both ways
| Document | Relation | Office | Cited during |
|---|---|---|---|
| US10574942B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| WO2016124390A1 | Cited by | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | International search |
| US9628422B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US9501718B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US12004281B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US11096255B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US10143050B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US2016174323A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US9318950B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US11750205B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US2017147088A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US2014236266A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US2015028821A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| CN106664758A | Cited by | China | Search report |
| US9879980B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US2014052390A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US11096260B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US2015377609A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US9591711B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US11974379B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US9900556B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US10849210B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US8743023B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US11143749B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US2023164892A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US10156912B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US11864293B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US2014139325A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| TWI616071B | Cited by | Taiwan Province of China | Examiner |
| US9155153B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US12167167B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US10771281B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US2019037670A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US2013257312A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US9474133B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US11871490B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US9060410B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US11324094B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| EP3975666A1 | Cited by | European Patent Office (EPO) | Search report |
| US8760370B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US10044983B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US9516719B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US8754832B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US10609781B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US9265968B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US11863905B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| WO2016001065A1 | Cited by | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | International search |
| US10210733B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| CN107211517A | Cited by | China | Search report |
| US9157415B1 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US9867261B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Search report |
| US2015267684A1 | Cited by | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US10076013B2 | Cited by | United States of America | Applicant |
| US2002005861A1 | Cites | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US2007188113A1 | Cites | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US2008266236A1 | Cites | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US2012049760A1 | Cites | United States of America | Pre-grant |
| US6573666B1 | Cites | United States of America | Pre-grant |
4 members in 1 office; this record represents the family
Priority claims1
| Document | Office | Kind | Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| 201161453412 | United States of America | P |
Members4
| Document | Office | Kind | |
|---|---|---|---|
| US2012249013A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9066381B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US2016113093A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9554450B2 | United States of America | B2 |
37 transactions on the USPTO file
Allowed without a rejection on record.
- Non-final rejections
- 0
- Final rejections
- 0
- RCEs
- 0
- Appeals
- 0
Over time
Point at a mark for the transactionTransactions
| Event | Code | |
|---|---|---|
| Expire PatentEXP. | EXP. | |
| Maintenance Fee Reminder MailedREM. | REM. | |
| Applicant Has Filed a Verified Statement of Small Entity Status in Compliance with 37 CFR 1.27SMAL | SMAL | |
| Payment of Maintenance Fee, 4th Year, Large EntityM1551 | M1551 | |
| Recordation of Patent Grant MailedPGM/ | PGM/ | |
| Patent Issue Date Used in PTA CalculationAllowedPTAC | PTAC | |
| Email NotificationEML_NTR | EML_NTR | |
| Issue Notification MailedAllowedWPIR | WPIR | |
| Dispatch to FDCD1935 | D1935 | |
| Application Is Considered Ready for IssuePILS | PILS | |
| Issue Fee Payment VerifiedN084 | N084 | |
| Issue Fee Payment ReceivedIFEE | IFEE | |
| Electronic ReviewELC_RVW | ELC_RVW | |
| Email NotificationEML_NTF | EML_NTF | |
| Mail Notice of AllowanceAllowedMN/=. | MN/=. | |
| Notice of Allowance Data Verification CompletedAllowedN/=. | N/=. | |
| Examiner's Amendment CommunicationEX.A | EX.A | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Case Docketed to Examiner in GAUDOCK | DOCK | |
| Case Docketed to Examiner in GAUDOCK | DOCK | |
| Case Docketed to Examiner in GAUDOCK | DOCK | |
| Case Docketed to Examiner in GAUDOCK | DOCK | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| PG-Pub Issue NotificationPG-ISSUE | PG-ISSUE | |
| Application Dispatched from OIPEOIPE | OIPE | |
| Application Is Now CompleteCOMP | COMP | |
| Sent to Classification ContractorPGPC | PGPC | |
| Filing Receipt - UpdatedFLRCPT.U | FLRCPT.U | |
| Additional Application Filing FeesADDFLFEE | ADDFLFEE | |
| A statement by one or more inventors satisfying the requirement under 35 USC 115, Oath of the ApplicOATHDECL | OATHDECL | |
| Notice Mailed--Application Incomplete--Filing Date AssignedINCD | INCD | |
| Filing ReceiptFLRCPT.O | FLRCPT.O | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| IFW Scan & PACR Auto Security ReviewSCAN | SCAN | |
| Initial Exam Team nnIEXX | IEXX | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 |
8 legal events, as the office reported them to INPADOC
Over the term
Point at a mark for the eventEvents
| Event | Code | |
|---|---|---|
| Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance feeLapsedFP | FP | |
| Lapse for failure to pay maintenance feesLapsedPATENT EXPIRED FOR FAILURE TO PAY MAINTENANCE FEES (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: EXP.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITYLAPS | LAPS | |
| Information on status: patent discontinuationPATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362STCH | STCH | |
| Fee payment procedureMAINTENANCE FEE REMINDER MAILED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: REM.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITYFEPP | FEPP | |
| Fee payment procedureENTITY STATUS SET TO SMALL (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: SMAL); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITYFEPP | FEPP | |
| Maintenance fee paymentMAFP | MAFP | |
| Information on status: patent grantGrantedPATENTED CASESTCF | STCF | |
| AssignmentAS | AS |
Numbers
- Publication
- 20120249013
- Application
- 13422808
Titles
- English
- SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LOW LEVEL DIMMING
Patent term adjustment
- A delay
- +651 daysthe office missed an examination deadline
- B delay
- +99 dayspendency past three years
- Net adjustment
- 750 days
Classification
- CPC, 6
- H05B47/115
- H05B45/18
- Y02B20/40
- H05B47/11
- H05B47/198
- H05B47/199
- IPC, 2
- H05B37 02
- H05B44 00